November 2006
ÂŁ25
Š Crown copyright 2006
Published with the permission of HM Treasury on behalf of
the Controller of Her Majestyâs Stationery Office.
The text in this document (excluding the Royal Coat of Arms
and departmental logos) may be reproduced free of charge
in any format or medium providing that it is reproduced
accurately and not used in a misleading context. The material
must be acknowledged as Crown copyright and the title of
the document specified.
Any enquiries relating to the copyright in this document
should be sent to:
HMSO
Licensing Division
St Clements House
2-16 Colegate
Norwich
NR3 1BQ
Fax: 01603 723000
E-mail: hmsolicensing@cabinet-office.x.gsi.gov.uk
HM Treasury contacts
This document can be found on the Treasury website at:
hm-treasury.gov.uk
For general enquiries about HM Treasury and its work, contact:
Correspondence and Enquiry Unit
HM Treasury
1 Horse Guards Road
London
SW1A 2HQ
Tel: 020 7270 4558
Fax: 020 7270 4861
E-mail: public.enquiries@hm-treasury.gov.uk
ISBN-10: X-XXXXX-XXX-X
ISBN-13: XXX-X-XXXXX-XXX-X
Printed by The Stationery Office 11/06
Printed on at least 75% recycled paper.
When you have finished with it please recycle it again.
PU021
C
O N T E N T S
Page
Foreword
1
Executive Summary
3
Chapter 1
Definition
11
Chapter 2
Challenges and Opportunities
23
Chapter 3
Performance
35
Chapter 4
Instruments
45
Chapter 5
Operations
77
Chapter 6
Governance
111
Chapter 7
Conclusion
119
Annex A
Glossary
121
Annex B
Call for evidence
129
F
O R E W O R D
The Gowers Review
For many citizens, Intellectual Property (IP) is an obscure and distant domain â its laws shrouded in jargon and
technical mystery, its applications relevant only to a specialist audience. And yet IP is everywhere. Even a
simple coffee jar relies on a range of IP rights â from patents to copyright, designs to trade marks.
In the modern world, knowledge capital, more than physical capital, drives the UK economy. Against the
backdrop of the increasing importance of ideas, IP rights, which protect their value, are more vital than ever.
The ideal IP system creates incentives for innovation, without unduly limiting access for consumers and follow-
on innovators. It must strike the right balance in a rapidly changing world so that innovators can see further
by standing on the shoulders of giants.
The Governmentâs decision to commission this Review was an explicit recognition both of the growing
importance of IP and of the challenges brought by the changing economic environment. In commissioning the
Review, the Chancellor and the Secretaries of State for Trade and Industry, and Culture, Media and Sport
asked me to establish whether the system was fit for purpose in an era of globalisation, digitisation and
increasing economic specialisation.
The answer is a qualified âyesâ. I do not think the system is in need of radical overhaul. However, taking a holistic
view of the system, I believe there is scope for reform to serve better the interests of consumers and industry
alike. There are three areas in which the Review concentrates its recommendations to improve the UK
framework for innovation:
â˘
strengthening enforcement of IP rights, whether through clamping down on piracy or trade in
counterfeit goods;
â˘
reducing costs of registering and litigating IP rights for businesses large and small; and
â˘
improving the balance and flexibility of IP rights to allow individuals, businesses and institutions to use
content in ways consistent with the digital age.
Much IP policy is framed by European, and indeed global, treaties and agreements. I recognise that not all the
recommendations are within the direct purview of the UK Government. However, I have not shied away from
making recommendations with European or broader international import when they seemed necessary.
Indeed, with the European Commission currently reviewing both the copyright acquis and the question of a
Community patent, this is a timely point at which to put forward the Reviewâs arguments.
I would like to express my thanks to all those who assisted me in producing this Review. Many individuals and
organisations gave generously of their time to contribute insights, and in particular the great diversity and
depth of responses to the Call for Evidence were invaluable. I owe a special debt to the Review team, who have
supported me throughout: Richard Sargeant, Steve Coles, Alastair Cowie, Suzy Kantor, Nicola Kay, Stephen
Rowan and Nathan Sansom.
I hope this Review provides sound recommendations on how the IP regime should respond to the challenges
that it faces. Getting the balance right is vital to driving innovation, securing investment and stimulating
competition. Lasting success will belong to those who get this right.
Andrew Gowers
1
2
The Gower Review
E
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
The Gowers Review
E.1
Globalisation and technological advance are changing the shape of the world
economy. Increased international trade and investment flows and the emergence of
economies such as China and India create great new opportunities for advanced economies
such as the UK, but also great challenges. The UKâs comparative advantage in the changing
global economy is increasingly likely to come through high value added, knowledge intensive
goods and services. The Intellectual Property (IP) system provides an essential framework
both to promote and protect the innovation and creativity of industry and artists.
E.2
The increasing importance of knowledge capital is seen in its contribution to the
value of firms. In 1984 the top ten firms listed on the London Stock Exchange had a combined
market value of ÂŁ40 billion and net assets of the same value. Advance twenty years and the
asset stock of the largest firms has doubled while their market value has increased nearly ten
times.
1
The difference in value is accounted for by intangible assets: goodwill, reputation and,
most importantly, knowledge capital. Knowledge based industries have become central to the
UK economy â in 2004 the Creative Industries contributed 7.3 per cent of UK Gross Value
Added, and from 1997 to 2004 they grew significantly quicker than the average rate across the
whole economy.
2
The pharmaceutical industry accounted for almost a quarter of the UKâs
total R&D expenditure in 2004. Innovative ideas create value, whether they are improved
products, new brands or creative expressions. As a result, IP rights â the means by which these
assets are owned â have become a cornerstone of economic activity.
E.3
Global and technological changes have brought undoubted opportunities for
businesses and consumers. The erosion of global trade barriers has enabled companies to
reach ever larger markets and gives consumers a wider range of products to choose from.
Technological changes have enabled more âopenâ models of innovation, with greater cross-
fertilisation across firms and the ability to harness the creativity of consumers.
E.4
However, while global and technical changes have given IP a greater prominence in
developed economies, they have also brought challenges. Ideas are expensive to make, but
cheap to copy. Ideas are becoming even cheaper to copy and distribute as digital technology
and the Internet reduce the marginal cost of reproduction and distribution towards zero. As
a result, the UKâs music and film industries lose around twenty per cent of their annual
turnover through pirated CDs and illegal online file sharing. Furthermore, global markets
must contend with rights that remain largely national in scope.
E.5
In response to the profound global changes affecting the IP system, the Chancellor of
the Exchequer commissioned this Review in the 2005 Pre-Budget Report. The Review was
charged with examining all the elements of the IP system, to ensure that it delivers incentives
while minimising inefficiency. Its terms of reference were to consider:
â˘
the way in which Government administers the awarding of IP rights and its support to
consumers and business;
â˘
how well businesses are able to negotiate the complexity and expense of the copyright
and patent system, including copyright and patent licensing arrangements, litigation
and enforcement; and
Terms of
reference
Challenges
Opportunities
Increasing
importance of
intangible assets
The changing
context
3
1
Wealth Creation in the Knowledge Economy
, Potter D., accessed at: http://www.number-10.gov.uk/output/Page3051.asp.
2
DCMS Creative Industries Economic Estimates
, DCMS, 2006.
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
â˘
whether the current technical and legal IP infringement framework reflects the digital
environment, and whether provisions for âfair useâ by citizens are reasonable.
E.6
The Review found the current system to be broadly performing satisfactorily.
However, there are a number of areas where reform is necessary to improve the system for all
its users. The Review therefore sets out a range of pragmatic recommendations, which can be
grouped around three themes: first, stronger enforcement of rights; second, lower costs for
business; and finally, balanced and flexible rights.
E.7
Counterfeit goods and piracy are damaging the UKâs creative industries, as well as
threatening jobs. The Review recommends:
â˘
consulting to ensure that an effective and dissuasive system of damages exists
for civil IP cases. This will provide an effective deterrent to IP infringement;
â˘
matching penalties in the physical and digital world for IP infringement. This
will remove the current unjustifiable anomaly whereby infringement in the
digital world carries softer penalties than infringement in the physical world.
This is particularly important given that so much infringement now occurs via
digital media; and
â˘
giving Trading Standards the power and duty to enforce copyright
infringement. This will ensure that preventing the sale of copyright infringing
goods, for example counterfeit CDs, will become a duty of Trading Standards
agencies throughout the country.
E.8
It is expensive to obtain and defend IP rights in the UK, and costs spiral when
securing rights internationally. These costs are onerous for all businesses, and for SMEs in
particular. The Review recommends:
â˘
better provision of IP information to UK businesses at home and abroad. This
will extend from greater information provided to firms on how to use IP
strategically when they register at Companies House, through stronger
support and better information via the Business Link network, to expert
advice provided by UK Trade and Investment and the Patent Office for UK
firms abroad;
â˘
consulting to enable fast-track litigation to be used in IP cases. This should
mean that capped fees, limited disclosure and time limits will apply to IP
cases, greatly reducing the cost; and
â˘
supporting the establishment of a unitary Community Patent (COMPAT). This
will substantially reduce the cost of patent applications in Europe, which are
currently twice as expensive as in the USA.
E.9
Balanced and flexible rights should enable consumers to use material in ways that do
not damage the interests of rights holders and will help ensure that citizens have trust in the
system. They will enable cultural institutions to preserve our heritage, and help research
institutes to further knowledge by using ideas protected by others. The Review recommends:
â˘
proposing an âorphan worksâ provision to the European Commission. This will
make it easier for creative artists to re-use âorphanâ copyright protected
material (for which no author can be found), thus unlocking previously
unusable material;
Balanced and
flexible rights
Lower costs for
business
Stronger
enforcement of
rights
4
The Gowers Review
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
â˘
introducing a limited private copying exception, which will allow consumers
to format shift legitimately purchased content, for example music from a CD
to an MP3 player. This will allow consumers to use copyright protected
material in a manner which does not damage the interests of rights holders;
â˘
clarifying the research exception. This will create greater scope for research on
protected material by universities and business and expand the stock of
knowledge; and
â˘
enabling libraries to copy and format shift master copies of archival works.
This will prevent valuable cultural artefacts from deteriorating because they
exist only on outdated formats.
E.10
The Review takes an evidence-based approach to its policy analysis and has
supplemented internal analysis by commissioning external experts to examine the economic
impact of changes to the length of copyright term on sound recordings, and the question of
orphan works. Both of these reports are published alongside the Review. The Review also
consulted widely with a range of stakeholders in industry, academia and the public sector.
The formal Call for Evidence between March and April 2006 received over 500 responses.
These are listed in Annex B, and those that were not submitted as confidential have been
published on the Review website.
E.11
The remainder of the Review is structured into two broad sections. The first half
comprises an explanation of what IP is and what it is for, an analysis of recent trends, and an
assessment of how well the current system is performing. The second half considers:
â˘
the
instruments
of the IP system (patents, copyrights, trade marks and
designs), and makes recommendations to ensure they are balanced, coherent
and flexible;
â˘
the
operation
of these instruments, and makes recommendations to improve
the way rights are awarded, used and enforced; and
â˘
the
governance
of the IP system, and makes recommendations to improve IP-
related bodies, such as the Patent Office and the courts.
The full list of recommendations follows.
E.12
Taken together, the package of measures the Review recommends will ensure that the
UK has an IP system that meets the needs of all its users, and which is fit for the digital age.
Structure of the
Review
The approach of
the Review
5
The Gowers Review
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
6
The Gowers Review
List of recommendations in the Review
Instruments
Balance
Recommendation 1: Amend section 60(5) of the Patents Act 1977 to clarify the research exception to facilitate
experimentation, innovation and education.
Recommendation 2: Enable educational provisions to cover distance learning and interactive whiteboards by
2008 by amending sections 35 and 36 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act, 1988 (CDPA).
Recommendation 3: The European Commission should retain the length of protection on sound recordings and
performersâ rights at 50 years.
Recommendation 4: Policy makers should adopt the principle that the term and scope of protection for IP
rights should not be altered retrospectively.
Coherence
Recommendation 5: UKPO should undertake joint working with African patent offices from mid-2007, with the
aim of:
â˘
helping them to take advantage of the flexibilities currently existing in the WTO/TRIPS architecture
where appropriate; and
â˘
encouraging them to make positive use of IP rights through dissemination of information in patents.
Recommendation 6: Encourage the international community under the auspices of the WTO to review the
TRIPS status of the least developed countries prior to 2016 and consider whether further extension for
reaching TRIPS compliance would be appropriate.
Recommendation 7: Government should encourage WTO members to ratify the amendments to TRIPS to
make importation of drugs easier and cheaper.
Flexibility
Recommendation 8: Introduce a limited private copying exception by 2008 for format shifting for works
published after the date that the law comes into effect. There should be no accompanying levies for consumers.
Recommendation 9: Allow private copying for research to cover all forms of content. This relates to the
copying, not the distribution, of media.
Recommendation 10a: Amend s.42 of the CDPA by 2008 to permit libraries to copy the master copy of all
classes of work in permanent collection for archival purposes and to allow further copies to be made from the
archived copy to mitigate against subsequent wear and tear.
Recommendation 10b: Enable libraries to format shift archival copies by 2008 to ensure records do not become
obsolete.
Recommendation 11: Propose that Directive 2001/29/EC be amended to allow for an exception for creative,
transformative or derivative works, within the parameters of the Berne Three Step Test.
Recommendation 12: Create an exception to copyright for the purpose of caricature, parody or pastiche by
2008.
Recommendation 13: Propose a provision for orphan works to the European Commission, amending Directive
2001/29/EC.
Recommendation 14a: The Patent Office should issue clear guidance on the parameters of a âreasonable
searchâ for orphan works, in consultation with rights holders, collecting societies, rights owners and archives,
when an orphan works exception comes into being.
Recommendation 14b: The Patent Office should establish a voluntary register of copyright; either on its own,
or through partnerships with database holders, by 2008.
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
7
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 15: Make it easier for users to file notice of complaints procedures relating to Digital Rights
Management tools by providing an accessible web interface on the Patent Office website by 2008.
Recommendation 16: DTI should investigate the possibility of providing consumer guidance on DRM systems
through a labelling convention without imposing unnecessary regulatory burdens.
Recommendation 17: Maintain policy of not extending patent rights beyond their present limits within the
areas of software, business methods and genes.
Operations
Award
Recommendation 18: The Government should encourage the EPO to pursue work sharing with the USPTO
and JPO.
Recommendation 19: The Patent Office should pursue work sharing arrangements with EPC member States,
and trilaterally with the USA and Japan to reduce cross-national duplication of effort.
Recommendation 20: Continue to support and expedite the establishment of a single Community Patent
through negotiations in Europe.
Recommendation 21: Government should support the London Agreement as an interim step towards
COMPAT, and as an improvement in its own right.
Recommendation 22: Maintain a high quality of patents awarded by increasing the use of âsection 21â
observations: streamlining procedures and raising awareness.
Recommendation 23: The Patent Office should conduct a pilot of Beth Noveckâs Community Patent Review in
2007 in the UK to determine whether this would have a positive impact on the quality of the patent stock.
Recommendation 24: The Patent Office should develop stronger links with universities and other research
institutions, including through short placements, to ensure that IP examiners are aware of recent
developments in technology.
Recommendation 25a: Introduce accelerated grant process for patents to complement the accelerated
examination and combined patent search and examination procedures.
Recommendation 25b: Introduce fast track registration for trade marks.
Use
Recommendation 26: The Patent Office should provide comprehensive information on how to register and use
IP rights for firms registering with Companies House.
Recommendation 27: Improve SME business IP support by establishing formal collaboration between the
Patent Office and Business Link and by conducting a pilot replicating the French âIP Genesisâ scheme.
Recommendation 28: Investigate how best to provide practical IP advice to UK firms operating in foreign
markets, in coordination with industry bodies, the Patent Office and UK Trade and Investment.
Recommendation 29: The Patent Office should develop âBusiness-to-Businessâ model IP licences through
industry consultation, and assessment of the Lambert model licences.
Recommendation 30a: The Patent Office should publish and maintain an open standards web database, linked
to the EPOâs esp@cenet web database, containing all patents issued under licence of right.
Recommendation 30b: The Patent Office should publish and maintain an open standards web database, linked
to esp@cenet containing all expired patents.
Recommendation 31: DTI should consider whether guidance for firms on reporting of intangible assets could
be improved, including the provision of model IP reports.
Recommendation 32: Form a working group with Patent Office, RDA and Business Link representation, to
identify and promote best practice to maximise the use of effective schemes nationwide.
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
8
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 33: The Review invites the OFT to consider conducting a market survey into the UK
collecting societies to ensure the needs of all stakeholders are being met.
Recommendation 34: Increase cooperation between the UK Patent Office, the Office of Fair Trading and the
Competition Commission to ensure that competition and IP policy together foster competitive and innovative
markets for the benefit of consumers.
Enforcement
Recommendation 35: The Patent Office should continue to raise public awareness, focussing in particular on
the wider impacts of IP crime, and the exceptions to rights.
Recommendation 36: Match penalties for online and physical copyright infringement by amending section 107
of the CDPA by 2008.
Recommendation 37: Monitor success of current measures to combat unfair competition in cases relating to
IP, and if changes are found to be ineffective, Government should consult on appropriate changes.
Recommendation 38: DCA should review the issues raised in its forthcoming consultation paper on damages
and seek further evidence to ensure that an effective and dissuasive system of damages exists for civil IP cases
and that it is operating effectively. It should bring forward any proposals for change by the end of 2007.
Recommendation 39: Observe the industry agreement of protocols for sharing data between ISPs and rights
holders to remove and disbar users engaged in âpiracyâ. If this has not proved operationally successful by the
end of 2007, Government should consider whether to legislate.
Recommendation 40: DTI should consult on measures to tighten regulation of occasional sales and markets by
2007.
Recommendation 41: The Home Office should recognise IP crime as an area for Police action as a component
of organised crime within the updated National Community Safety Plan.
Recommendation 42: Give Trading Standards the power to enforce copyright infringement by enacting section
107A of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 by 2007.
Recommendation 43: Strengthen Practice Directions, to provide greater encouragement for parties to
mediate, in particular this should raise the profile of mediation with judges.
Recommendation 44: The Patent Office should consult with the Judicial Studies Board to determine the extent
to which the complexity of IP law may give rise to a training need for judges and magistrates and their legal
advisers.
Recommendation 45: Support the establishment of a single EU court to adjudicate cross-border IP disputes by
promoting the European Patent Litigation Agreement.
Governance
Recommendation 46: Establish a new Strategic Advisory Board for IP policy (SABIP), covering the full range
of IP rights, reporting to the minister responsible, by 2007. The Board should be drawn from a wide range of
external experts as well as key senior policy officials from relevant government departments, and should be
based in London. ÂŁ150,000 should be allocated to fund the secretariat by the Patent Office.
Recommendation 47: The Patent Office should provide an annual IP strategic analysis fund of ÂŁ500,000
managed by the policy advisory board in consultation with the IP Policy Directorate.
Recommendation 48: Patent Office should introduce a clear split of responsibility between delivery and policy
directorates.
Recommendation 49: Encourage IP policy officials to obtain policy experience outside the IP Policy Branch, and
support short industry placement schemes for policy staff.
Recommendation 50: Realign UK Patent Office administrative fees to cover costs more closely on Patent Office
administrative operations (e.g. granting patents).
E
X E C U T I V E
S
U M M A R Y
E
9
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 51: Increase the transparency of Patent Office financial reporting.
Recommendation 52: Ensure that under current arrangements in the Patent Office, there is a clear internal
separation of responsibility between the granting of rights and disputes over their ownership or validity. This
should be achieved by clearly separating the line management structures.
Recommendation 53: Change the name of the UK Patent Office to the UK Intellectual Property Office (UK-
IPO) to reflect the breadth of functions the office has, and to dispel confusion.
Recommendation 54: DCA should review the issues raised in relation to IP cases and the fast track, and seek
views in the context of its forthcoming consultation paper, which will consider the case track limits, and how
the claims process can be made more timely, proportionate and cost-effective. It should bring forward any
proposals for change by the end of 2007.
10
The Gowers Review
1
D
E F I N I T I O N
The Gowers Review
W H AT I S I N T E L L E C T UA L P R O P E R T Y ?
1.1
Property is simply a bundle of rights to own, use and prevent others from using
something, for example a plot of land, a car or a house. Intellectual Property (IP) is a bundle
of rights that protects applications of ideas and information that have commercial value.
1
IP
rights give creators certain exclusive rights over the knowledge and information they create
(e.g. the text of a book) to prevent others using it without permission.
1.2
Unlike physical property, knowledge, ideas and creations are partial â
public goods
â.
Knowledge is inherently non-rivalrous. That means one personâs possession, use and
enjoyment of the good is not diminished by anotherâs possession, use and enjoyment of the
good. As Thomas Jefferson said: âhe who receives an idea from me, receives instruction
himself without lessening mine ... as he who lights his taper at mine, receives light without
darkening meâ.
2
By contrast, physical property is typically rivalrous, with one personâs
consumption preventing simultaneous consumption by another. Privatising property gives
rights over it to a legal individual, creating a legal barrier which prevents others from
accessing it. IP confers a set of time-limited legal rights over the expression and use of certain
ideas. Although the knowledge protected by the IP remains non-rivalrous, the legal force of IP
rights prevents others from using it.
W H Y D O W E N E E D I N T E L L E C T UA L P R O P E R T Y ?
1.3
IP serves three principal functions: to incentivise knowledge (and hence wealth)
creation; to accumulate knowledge in a culture; and to protect a distinctive identity. But those
rights must be balanced in order to achieve these three aims. Listening to the radio, buying a
branded product, taking a medicine and storing food in a fridge are all possible because
inventions and creations have been incentivised through the IP system.
Knowledge is
non-rivalrous
11
Box 1.1: IP resides in everyday objects
The contents of a jar, the lid and seal may
be protected by
patents
. Registered and
unregistered
design rights
can also protect the
lid and shape of the jar.
Copyright
can protect
the artwork in labels, and
trade marks
can
protect the shape of the jar, labels, colours used,
and brand names.
1
Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyright, Trade Marks and Allied Rights
, Cornish W. and Llewelyn D., 2003.
2
Letter to Isaac McPherson
, Jefferson T., 13 August 1813.
Source:The âNESCAFĂ Gold Blendâ image is reproduced with the kind permission of SociĂŠtĂŠ des Produits NestlĂŠ S.A.
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
I P r i g h t s p r o v i d e i n c e n t i v e s t o c r e a t e k n o w l e d g e
1.4
Ideas are expensive to produce but cheap to copy. The fixed costs of producing
knowledge are high. Hollywood blockbusters can costs hundreds of millions of dollars to
make and R&D for drugs can cost billions of pounds. At the same time, the marginal costs of
production, both for drugs and for digital files, are very low. Without protection, others will
free ride on the creatorâs initial investment and sell the invention or creation at a much lower
cost. If the innovator knows that someone else can do this easily, there will be no financial
incentive to innovate in the first instance. Clearly, wealth generation is only one motivation
for creativity. For example, Wilfred Owenâs poetry written during the First World War was
motivated by a desire to communicate his experience of war. But without protection there
would be no economic incentive to fund innovation or creativity.
1.5
IP rights create legal barriers to accessing or using knowledge or information by
granting exclusive rights to inventors and creators. These exclusive rights prevent others from
free riding on investment and enable the rights owner to exploit their knowledge or creativity
on the market â thus creating incentives to innovate.
I P r i g h t s h e l p t o d e v e l o p p u b l i c k n o w l e d g e
1.6
As every creator âstands on the shoulders of giantsâ, it follows that the more knowledge
that is available, the more others can develop and progress. Much of the value from the
inventions and creativity protected by IP can only be realised if that knowledge is widely
accessible to others. To secure an IP right, the idea must be made public, thereby adding to
the common stock of knowledge available for progress.
1.7
Largely for this reason, IP rights are more limited than physical property rights. Patent
applications are required to âlay openâ the details of an invention as a condition of grant and the
requirement of disclosure enables others to improve upon existing inventions. After the patent
protection ends, the invention becomes public. For example, Aspirin was patented in 1899 by
the pharmaceutical company Bayer and became a proprietary drug for treating headaches.
The structure of the molecule was published along with the patent, but only the company
owning the patent had the right to manufacture the drug. The patent expired in 1917 and its
formula is now publicly and freely available, allowing research, manufacture or sale of Aspirin
by anyone. If IP rights do not sufficiently secure the ownership of the invention, either the
investment will not be made or alternative tools, such as trade secrets, will be used. In either
case, the public stock of knowledge available for future inventors and creators is diminished.
T h e c o s t s o f I P a n d t h e n e e d f o r b a l a n c e
1.8
The very essence of IP rights entails a trade-off. On the one hand, IP rights provide
economic incentives to innovate, but on the other, the exclusive rights that they confer to
achieve this allow monopoly prices and associated welfare losses and prevent access by other
innovators. In the short run, this information is largely privatised. In the long run,
information protected by IP rights falls into the public domain and enables follow-on
innovation. So there is a trade-off between incentives on one side and costs to consumers and
limited access for follow-on innovators on the other. It is therefore crucial to have the right
balance in the system.
1.9
Achieving this balance is made more difficult by the vocabulary used to discuss IP
policy and practice. Copyright infringement through unauthorised copying and distribution
of music and video across the Internet is likened to stealing by some, and to sharing by others.
Those who seek to prevent others from using a patented invention without permission are
branded âtrollsâ. Those who copy and distribute material illegally are called âpiratesâ. And the
problem of âorphanâ works, which arises where copyright owners are untraceable, perhaps
provokes an easy sympathy.
IP rights entail a
trade-off
12
The Gowers Review
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
W H AT A R E T H E F O R M S O F I N T E L L E C T UA L P R O P E R T Y ?
1.10
Several different forms of IP rights have evolved to protect different applications of
knowledge. The four most common are patents, copyright, designs and trade marks; Chart 1.1
summarises the applications to which different rights apply. In practice the situation is more
complex, encompassing different forms of a right (e.g. unregistered and registered designs),
and some other rights that are of their own kind (e.g. semi-conductor rights). These rights are
described in more detail below.
1.11
A patent is a set of exclusive rights granted by the state to a person for a fixed period
of time (twenty years in the UK) in exchange for the regulated, public disclosure of certain
details of an invention. The exclusive right granted to a patentee is a negative right that
prevents others from making, using, selling, offering to sell or importing the claimed
invention. However, the right itself does not give the patentee the right to make, use or sell the
invention, and the patentee must still comply with other laws and regulations. For example,
a patent on a drug does not give the right to sell that drug in the UK without a licence from
the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency or the European Commission.
Products eligible for patent protection must:
â˘
be novel; the invention must never have been made public in any way,
anywhere in the world, before the priority date (normally the date on which an
application for a patent is filed);
â˘
involve an inventive step; an invention involves an inventive step if, when
compared with what is already known, it would not be obvious to someone
skilled in the relevant art;
â˘
be capable of industrial application; an invention must be capable of being
made or used in some kind of industry; and
Patents protect
useful ideas
13
The Gowers Review
Chart 1.1: The instruments of IP and common applications
e.g. logo, shape, sound, colour
goods or services
Patent
Design
Shape
Configuration
Ornamentation
Knowledge
Useful idea
Original expression
Distinctive identity
Trade mark
Badge of identity for
Non-physical application
Physical application
Application
Simple
e.g. pharmaceutical molecule
Complex
e.g. microprocessor element
Application
Literary
Graphical
Videographic
Audio
Copyright
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
â˘
not be âexcludedâ; an invention is not patentable if it is: a discovery; a scientific
theory or mathematical method; an aesthetic creation such as a literary,
dramatic or artistic work; a scheme or method for performing a mental act,
games or business methods; the presentation of information; or a computer
program; but these things are only excluded when the claim relates to them âas
suchâ.
1.12
The requirements that an invention must meet in order to be patentable aim to
achieve the balance between access and incentive described above. For example, a
mathematical theory might be useful and capable of industrial application, as in recent
advances in number theory for cryptography, but it would be unpatentable because of the
potential benefits that might accrue from the basic âbuilding blocksâ of research being
publicly available.
1.13
Patents have evolved over many years. The earliest known English patent for an
invention was granted by Henry VI to John of Utynam in 1449. The patent gave John a twenty
year monopoly for a method of making stained glass, required for the windows of Eton
College. Under the Tudors it became common practice for the Crown to grant monopolies for
trades and manufacturers, including patents for invention. Public disclosure for patents
became a general requirement in the eighteenth century, and the Patent Act 1902 instituted a
limited examination into the novelty of the invention before a patent was granted. The
principal piece of domestic legislation currently governing patents is the Patents Act 1977.
1.14
Where a work is protected by copyright it cannot legally be reproduced, distributed,
communicated to the public, lent, rented out or publicly performed without the consent of
the owner. Copyright subsists in a wide range of creative or artistic forms or âworksâ, including
poems, plays and other literary works, movies, choreographic works, musical compositions,
audio recordings, paintings, drawings, sculptures, software, radio and television broadcasts.
1.15
There is no official register for copyright in the UK. Copyright comes into effect
automatically and without any necessary process as soon as something that can be protected
is created and âfixedâ in some way, e.g. on paper, on film, as a sound recording, or as an
electronic record on the Internet. Copyright law covers the way in which the work is
expressed, rather than the idea behind the work. So Dan Brownâs
The Da Vinci Code
was
recently found not to have infringed the copyright of an earlier book which contained many
of the theories found in
The Da Vinci Code
. Drawing on ideas of other copyrighted works does
not infringe those copyrights.
1.16
Exceptions to copyright exist to rectify two problems. The first is transaction costs.
There are uses of copyright protected material for which it would be too costly and too time
consuming to clear the rights, for example in a book review. Second, there are issues of equity.
Copyright prevents the copying and communication of literary works. In the absence of
exceptions, copying a text into Braille would be infringing copyright. To deal with such cases
âfair dealingâ legislation exists, which creates a space in which it is not illegal to infringe
copyright. Exemptions include: news reporting and criticism; copying for blind users;
copying for non-commercial private research under library privilege; copying for
preservation; and copying and communication for education.
1.17
Copyright was first established in the Statute of Anne in 1710, which declared that
copyright comes into existence with the act of composition by an author
3
and is accorded to
the author. The author could then transfer their right to a publisher for fourteen years, which
could be extended for another fourteen years should the author still be alive. In 1774, the
House of Lords ruled in
Donaldson
v
. Beckett
that perpetual copyright was illegal: they
Copyright
protects original
expression
14
The Gowers Review
3
The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period
, St Clair W., 2004.
History of
patents
History of
copyright
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
concluded that no natural law of copyright existed and that copyright was a purely statutory
right created for the utilitarian purpose of encouraging literary efforts.
4
However, throughout
the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, copyright was extended and the scope of protection
was broadened under pressure from publishers and as a result of international
harmonisation. The principal piece of domestic legislation currently governing copyright is
the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.
1.18
A trade mark is a badge of origin for goods or services; it can be a word, name, logo,
colour, sound or shape. Once registered it gives the right to prevent others from using the
same or similar marks on the same or similar products. By providing a distinctive identity for
a product or service, trade marks lower the search costs for consumers by providing them
with information about the nature and quality of the product; this also gives brands an
incentive to build up good reputations and to develop brand loyalty.
1.19
Trade marks lose protection when they cease being used or become generic, i.e. when
a brand name comes to stand for a general class of items. For example âescalatorâ and
âgramophoneâ were both marks that were afforded protection. In Austria, Sony no longer has
exclusive rights to the term âWalkmanâ, and in Australia âLinuxâ is no longer eligible for
protection. Firms are keen for their trade marks not to become generic: Google recently wrote
to media outlets warning against inappropriate use of its trade mark for fear of losing
protection for its brand.
1.20
Marking of goods for various purposes, including distinguishing them from those of
other traders, dates back to ancient times. In the nineteenth century people began to think of
marks, which had become distinctive to a traderâs goods and so attracted valuable goodwill,
as a type of property. The Trade Marks Act 1905 gave the first statutory definition of a âtrade
markâ. The principal legislation governing UK trade marks is the Trade Marks Act 1994.
5
1.21
A registered design protects the appearance of the whole or part of a product,
including its shape, configuration and ornamentation. Such protection lasts up to a
maximum of 25 years. To qualify for registration, a design must be new and have individual
character, which means that the overall impression it produces on an informed user of the
design must differ from the overall impression produced on such a user by any design which
has already been made available to the public. Examples include floral or other decorative
patterns, or the shape of a product.
1.22
Design law was originally introduced with the Designing and Printing of Linen Act in
1787. This gave the owner two monthsâ exclusivity in the printing of designs on linen and
other fabrics. The Copyright and Design Act 1839 increased protection to every new or
original design and introduced a system of registration. Since then, the boundaries of design
protection have been gradually extended. In the UK registered designs are governed by the
Registered Designs Act 1949 and unregistered designs by Part 3 of the Copyright, Designs and
Patents Act 1988. In addition, a Community Design right (both registered and unregistered)
was introduced by Council Regulation 6/2002 on the Community Design. The Community
regime has begun to supplant the domestic design right as a way of protecting designs.
History of trade
marks
Designs protect
graphical
identifications
Trade marks
protect
distinctive
identity
15
The Gowers Review
4
(1774) 4 EURR 2407 Law Professorsâ Amici Brief in âMPAA v. 2600â CaseBrief Amicus Curiae in Support of Defendants-
Appellants, Supporting Reversal; Universal v. Reimerdes (Jan. 26, 2001) see Understanding the Copyright Clause,
Patterson L.R.,
Journal of the Copyright Society,
2000.
5
In 1995 the European Community introduced Community Trade Marks with (EC) Regulation No. 40/94 on the
Community Trade Mark.
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
1.23
The rights described protect a broad range of innovations and creations. For some
applications, such as plant varieties, semi-conductor topographies and databases, separate,
specific rights, known as sui generis, or of their own kind rights, have been developed which
better suit the attributes of those applications and the needs of the industry.
W H O U S E S I N T E L L E C T UA L P R O P E R T Y ?
1.24
In short, everyone uses IP. The Reviewâs Call for Evidence elicited over 500 responses
from industry, academia, creators, inventors, consumer groups and members of the public.
1.25
Industries such as pharmaceuticals, biotechnology and high-tech rely heavily on
patent protection to produce commercially viable products. Universities may patent
inventions created in laboratories, and license technology to commercial companies. IP
forms a link between those who invent and those who wish to bring new products to market.
1.26
The creative industries use IP to protect against the misuse of the expression of ideas
and works of art. In particular, there has recently been a great deal of attention given to the
downloading of music, and to a lesser extent films, and to protecting artists against copyright
infringement. There are many other owners and users of copyright who gain permission from
the artist to use works in films, television programmes and so on. A rise in user-led
innovation, which allows users to both use and create artistic products, has driven a rise in
creative outputs.
1.27
Consumers benefit from IP not only from the stream of innovative products and
inventions and creativity that would not otherwise be created by firms, but also from the
rights that protect the identities of well known goods and services. Trade marks act as
signposts of quality, preventing other firms passing off one make of good as being the same
as another.
1.28
Increasingly, firms are using overlapping IP rights to protect their products. For
example, new bands, whose artistic output will be protected by copyright, will often trade
mark their name so that when their works fall out of copyright protection, their brand will still
entitle their estates to some remuneration.
H O W I S I N T E L L E C T UA L P R O P E R T Y G OV E R N E D ?
1.29
A web of UK, EU and international bodies manage the framework for the IP rights
described above, and the operations associated with those rights (e.g. examining the novelty
of a patent claim). The following sections outline the various UK, European and international
bodies responsible for developing IP policy.
I P g o v e r n a n c e i n t h e U K
1.30
The current UK IP policy governance map is complex, with policy divided between
UK processes and EU/international processes. Within the different IP rights of patents,
copyright, trade marks and designs, some aspects are purely within national competence,
some purely within EU competence and some are a mixture of the two. Chart 1.2 shows the
current UK IP governance map.
Sui generis rights
protect specific
types of
inventions
16
The Gowers Review
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
1.31
The UK Patent Office is an Executive Agency of the Department of Trade and Industry
(DTI), and since 1991 has been a Trading Fund. The Patent Office is responsible for all the
main IP instruments, and not just for patents as its name implies. The principal functions of
the Patent Office are:
â˘
award:
granting UK patents as well as registering UK trade marks and designs;
â˘
awareness:
responsibility for raising awareness of IP-related issues among
businesses and consumers;
â˘
policy:
advising ministers on IP policy;
â˘
tribunal function:
Patent Office has a role in deciding disputes in respect of
patents, trade marks and both registered and unregistered design rights; and
â˘
enforcement:
leading the development of the UK IP crime strategy.
1.32
The function and organisation of the Patent Office is described in greater detail in
Chapter 6.
The Patent Office
17
The Gowers Review
Chart 1.2: IP policy governance
EPOrg
Responsible for EPC
Running EPOff
(grants EP(UK))
EPO decisions persuasive, not
binding on UK courts
EU
Mixed competence
for
IP and competition
issues
WTO
Responsible for TRIPS
(setting minimum
requirements
for IP system)
WIPO
Responsible for various treaties
(e.g. PCT, PLT, Paris Convention)
and administering PCT for
international applications
UK Patent Office (UKPO)
IP policy lead; making new legislation (with DTI)
â˘Administering patent-granting process; trade
mark and design registration
â˘Tribunal, dispute resolution
â˘Innovation support activities
â˘IP enforcement
UK IP
system
UK Parliament
IP legislation
Other stakeholders
Industry
Non-governmental
organisations
Public interest
Members of public
Competition authorities
Other Government
departments
Policy links
e.g. DCMS (creative industries)
DCA (courts)
DTI
New legislation with UKPO:
Office of Science and
Innovation (OSI)
Creative industries
Fair markets
Biotechnology
UK policy process
EU/International Policy Process
OHIM
Administer Community
Trade Mark and Community
Design appeals to Court
of First Instance and
European Court of Justice
â˘
European Court
of Justice
and
Court of
First Instance
UK courts
IP disputes
Appeals from UKPO
Interpretation of IP law
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
I P g o v e r n a n c e i n E u r o p e
1.33
Much domestic legislation over the past 30 years has been driven by UK compliance
with EU and international obligations, such as Patents Acts in 1977 and 2004, to bring the UK
into line with the European Patent Convention.
1.34
The European Patent Organisation was created in 1977 to grant patents in Europe
under the European Patent Convention of 1973. The European Patent Organisation has two
organs: the Administrative Council, which acts as the legislative body; and the European
Patent Office (EPO) in Munich, which acts as the executive body. The Administrative Council
is made up of members of the contracting states and is responsible for overseeing the work of
the Office, ratifying the budget and approving the actions of the President of the Office. The
EPO grants European patents for the Member States of the European Patent Convention. The
EPO provides a single patent grant procedure, but not yet a single patent from the point of
view of enforcement. Hence the patents granted are not European Community patents or
even Europe-wide patents, but a bundle of national patents.
1.35
The UKâs IP laws have now been harmonised to a substantial degree by EU Directives.
Indeed, the substantive law of registered designs and registered trade marks is now almost
entirely determined at the Community level.
6
In relation to copyright, the harmonisation is no
where near as complete, nevertheless the term of copyright
7
and most exclusive rights are
harmonised
8
as is the maximum scope of the exceptions
9
as well as many other aspects of
copyright law. The Community has not been so active in the area of patent law, although it has
harmonised the treatment of biotechnological inventions
10
and tried to do the same for
computer implemented inventions.
11
In recent years it has also set minimum standards in
relation to the civil enforcement of IP rights
12
and is presently trying to do the same for
criminal enforcement.
I n t e r n a t i o n a l I P g o v e r n a n c e
1.36
The World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) began in 1893 as BIRPI
(Bureaux Internationaux RĂŠunis pour la Protection de la PropriĂŠtĂŠ Intellectuelle), or the
International Office for the Protection of IP. It brought together the early conventions on
patents and copyright harmonisation, namely the Paris Convention for the Protection of
Industrial Property (1883) and the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic
Works (1886).
13
It was reconstituted in 1974 as a UN agency. WIPO serves as a body for
negotiating and mangaging the various international IP treaties. It now administers a number
of important treaties in addition to Paris and Berne. Of these other treaties, the UK is a party
to the (Rome) International Convention for the Protection of Performers, Producers of
Phonograms and Broadcasting Organisation (1961)
14
and has agreed to become a party to the
WIPO Copyright Treaty (WCT) and the WIPO Performance and Phonograms Treaty (WPPT).
The effect of these conventions and treaties is to require the UK to provide national treatment
(meaning the same treatment for foreigners and nationals) and certain minimum standards
to nationals of other contracting states. These standards include:
WIPO
European
Community
The European
Patent
Organisation
18
The Gowers Review
6
Directive 89/104/EC to approximate the laws of trade marks effectively harmonised substantive trade mark law, leaving
only minor matters and procedural matters to Member States. Similarly, Directive 98/71/EC on the legal protection of
designs did much the same for designs.
7
Directive 93/98/EEC harmonising the term of protection of copyright.
8
See Directive 92/100/EEC on rental and lending right and certain related rights as well as Directive 2001/29/EC on
copyright in the information society.
9
Article 5 of Directive 2001/29/EC.
10
Directive 98/44/EC on the legal protection of biotechnological inventions.
11
The proposal was eventually defeated by the European Parliament in July 2005.
12
Directive 2004/48/EC on the enforcement of intellectual property rights.
13
The UK is also a party to the UNESCO Universal Copyright Convention (last revised 1971).
14
The UK is also party to the less significant Convention for the Protection of Producers of Phonograms Against
Unauthorised Duplication of their Phonograms (1971).
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
â˘
the minimum term of copyright and related rights;
â˘
the minimum rights that must be granted to authors, performers, broadcasts
and phonogram producers; and
â˘
the maximum scope of the exceptions that are permitted in relation to certain
rights.
1.37
In addition, WIPO plays a key role in the administration of the Patents Cooperation
Treaty system, the Madrid Agreement and Protocol for trade marks and the Hague Agreement
for designs. These treaties provide a mechanism for making a single application for
protection of patents, trade marks and designs. Although in each case the application leads
to a bundle of national rights.
1.38
The UK makes representations to WIPO through the Patent Office. The objectives of
WIPO are to:
â˘
promote the protection of IP throughout the world through cooperation
among Member States and, where appropriate, in collaboration with any
other international organisation; and
â˘
ensure administrative cooperation among the unions.
15
1.39
World Trade Organization (WTO) involvement in IP is through the Trade-Related
Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights Agreement (TRIPS), which was agreed at the Uruguay
Round of the WTO negotiations. It came into effect in 1995 with the overall objective of
reducing âdistortions and impediments to international trade, promotion of effective and
adequate protection of IP rights and ensuring that measures and procedures to protect IP
rights do not themselves become barriers to legitimate tradeâ. Its principal areas of
competence are:
â˘
standards â TRIPS sets out minimum standards in relation to the subject
matter that must be be covered by each type of IP right as well as the
minimum term for trade marks and patents; it also sets out the maximum
scope of permissible exceptions. It requires all countries to come up to
compliance with substantive elements of Berne and Paris, with exception to
terms of Berne on moral rights;
â˘
enforcement â certain general principals of enforcement are laid down for all
countries so that rights holders can effectively enforce their rights; and
â˘
dispute settlement â the agreement makes disputes between WTO members
around TRIPS obligations part of the WTO dispute settlement procedures.
Between TRIPS coming into effect in 1995 and 2004, 24 disputes were brought
to the TRIPS council.
O T H E R M E T H O D S T O I N C E N T I V I S E I N N OVAT I O N
1.40
While this report principally deals with IP rights, they are only one method of
spurring innovation. As Table 1.1 below indicates, other commercial strategies like
confidentiality agreements and being first to market are often perceived to be more
important. The examples given below are important not only in their own right, but also
because they illustrate the balance that IP strikes (as described earlier in the chapter) between
private incentives and public accessibility.
WTO
19
The Gowers Review
15
Article 3 Convention Establishing the World Intellectual Property Organization.
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
Table 1.1: Enterprises rating different methods for protecting innovation
as being of âhighâ importance
Percentage of respondents
Size of enterprise: employees
10â250
250+
All 10+
Formal
Confidentiality agreements
11
22
11
Trade marks
6
16
6
Copyright
6
10
6
Patents
5
13
5
Registration of design
4
11
4
Strategic
Lead-time advantage on competitors
9
17
10
Secrecy 8
19
9
Complexity of design
5
9
5
Source: First findings from the UK Innovation Survey, 2005.
1.41
The main mechanism used as an alternative to formal IP is the trade secret. Examples
of knowledge protected by trade secrets include: a formula; practice; process; pattern; or
compilation of information which is protected so that the holder can gain economic benefits
derived from the secrecy of the information. Unlike patents, designs or copyright, trade
secrets are protected without any disclosure. In addition, reasonable efforts must be taken to
keep the information a secret, such as Non-Disclosure Agreements for new employees. The
most famous example of a trade secret is Coca-Cola, which has not patented its recipe. While
there are provisions to protect the owner if the secret is uncovered by improper or unlawful
means, the state provides little protection if the trade secret is exposed through reverse
engineering or independent duplication.
16
1.42
Under patronage a private or public body pays an individual to âthink interesting
thoughtsâ, in the hope that some of these ideas will have a practical or artistic application.
Patronage has been used since ancient times. For example, Dionysius supported scientists
while they developed military technology, including the catapult, and patronised Archimedes
while he worked on his theory of buoyancy. Contemporary patronage usually takes the form
of a research grant, with money available from the state or from private foundations; for
example, the Gates Foundation has invested in pharmaceuticals to combat the spread of
HIV/AIDS.
1.43
Prizes have also been used to provide an incentive for innovation and can be provided
ex-ante, for example the Longitude Prize set in 1714 by the English Parliament, or ex-post, for
example the Nobel Prizes. Both patronage and prizes can interact with IP rights (for example,
a patron might require the rights to an invention before granting the prize), but often they are
independent and serve to provide knowledge for public benefit.
Prizes
Patronage
Secrecy
20
The Gowers Review
16
Innovation and Incentives
, Scotchmer S., 2004, cites a survey of IP Owners Association member firms (Survey Results
from the 2003 Intellectual Property Owners Association Survey on Strategic Management of Intellectual Property;
Cockburn I., and Henderson R., 2003.) which showed that 80 per cent believe competitive advantage would be eroded
without trade-secrecy compared with only 66 per cent without patents and 33 per cent without copyright.
D
E F I N I T I O N
1
21
The Gowers Review
1.44
A recent and radical approach to knowledge accumulation rejects the propertisation
of knowledge. The approach of âopen sourceâ is for creators to allow open access to their
products, ideas and inventions, enabling information to be freely shared and developed. This
keeps transaction costs low and has allowed user-driven innovation to flourish. Examples of
open source projects include the Linux operating system and the Firefox Internet browser.
The incentive mechanism for contributors is reputation. However, open source has some
serious limitations; for example, the incentive mechanism is usually financially weaker than
using IP in its conventional commercial form and hence contributors often rely on
supplementary sources of income. When the definition is stretched to applications other than
software development, there is the potential for a number of new applications for generating
ideas outside of an âIPâ framework.
17
For example, Science Commons has extended this
general approach to foster the availability and distributed processing of scientific data.
18
1.45
For commercial and industrial applications, IP has grown to eclipse all but the trade
secret as a wealth creation mechanism.
19
The condition of disclosure means that IP brings a
greater amount of information that might enable future innovation into the public domain
than the trade secret would. The monopolies that IP rights grant allow rights holders to charge
high prices, but those rights provide firms with the incentive to supply what consumers
demand. If IP rights are balanced, coherent and flexible, the system will support greater
investment in R&D and will allow the access to knowledge that will stimulate future
innovation.
C O N C LU S I O N
1.46
This chapter explained what IP is and why it exists. Chapter 2 describes the economic
and technological changes that have created opportunities and challenges for innovation and
creativity and looks at how the IP framework has responded.
Open source
17
Wide Open
, Mulgan G. and Steinberg T., 2005.
18
www.sciencecommons.org.
19
Innovation and Incentives
, Scotchmer S., 2004.
22
The Gowers Review
2
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
The Gowers Review
2.1
The UK Intellectual Property (IP) framework has de
v
eloped in recent years against a
backdrop of profound change including rapid globalisation and technological change. Both
ha
v
e presented significant economic opportunities and significant challenges to the IP
system. As a result of these changes IP rights ha
v
e become increasingly important in
promoting inno
v
ation, but many of the en
v
ironmental challenges facing the IP system ha
v
e
yet to be addressed.
2.2
This chapter summarises the changing context for those using IP rights and the
implications of those changes. It then sets out the policy responses that ha
v
e been made to
address those challenges, and where problems still remain.
G LO B A L I S AT I O N
2.3
Globalisation is a term used to indicate the growing economic interdependence of
countries throughout the world. The trend towards global trade and outsourcing, as indicated
by rising trade and capital flows (see Chart 2.
1
below), is both a feature and a dri
v
er of
continuing globalisation. From
1
980 to 2002, trade in goods increased from $
1
30 billion to
$6,400 billion.
1
2.4
The increase in global trade has created larger markets for UK-based firms. For
example, income and population growth ha
v
e increased the size of the world market by a
factor of four since
1
950.
2
These wider markets also bring the challenge of increased
competition with inno
v
ati
v
e international firms dri
v
ing producti
v
ity growth in many sectors.
Larger markets
and increased
competition
Greater trade
23
1
Development and Globalisation: Facts and Figures
, United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, 2004.
2
Intellectual Property in a Global Economy
, Boldrin M. and Levine D., 2004.
Source: IMF WEO and UNCTAD, 2005.
0
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
Chart 2.1: Trends in world foreign direct investment (FDI),
exports and Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
(Index: 1970=100)
1970
1980
1990
2004
FDI
Exports
GDP
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.5
Larger markets and fiercer competition present both opportunities and challenges
for UK businesses. There are greater rewards for the most inno
v
ati
v
e firms to compete in e
v
er-
larger markets. And there are greater pressures on firms to inno
v
ate to sur
v
i
v
e or compete in
increasingly competiti
v
e global markets. Inno
v
ation is therefore key to rising to the
challenges and seizing the opportunities of globalisation.
2.6
As a consequence, the role of IP in incenti
v
ising that inno
v
ation has ne
v
er been more
important. But, just as globalisation presents challenges to business, so it also presents new
challenges for the IP system itself. Globalisation:
â˘
may shift the optimal balance in IP rights â the optimal length of IP protection
from an economic perspecti
v
e would be just long enough for the inno
v
ator to
recoup his initial in
v
estment. Any longer, and the monopoly prices that IP
allows are an unnecessary inefficiency. As the size of the market increases,
more products can be sold in the same amount of time. This has led some
economists to argue that terms of protection should be reduced in order to
maintain a balance between consumers and producers;
3
â˘
generates new enforcement risks â the increase in legitimate trade has been
accompanied by an increase in counterfeiting and other forms of illegal trade.
Customs officers in the EU seized
1
00 million counterfeit and pirated items
such as CDs, luxury clothing and perfume in 2004, a tenfold increase on
1
998
figures;
4
and
â˘
raises the problem of jurisdiction â the harmonisation of national IP laws has
lagged behind the integration of markets. While technology allows firms to
market products globally, licensing the IP rights separately in e
v
ery national
jurisdiction imposes significant additional costs on business in applying for,
licensing and enforcing IP rights.
I P p o l i c y r e s p o n s e s t o g l o b a l i s a t i o n
2.7
Notwithstanding these changes, in the UK and internationally patent law generally
remains at the indi
v
idual country le
v
el, so a patent granted in one country does not
automatically apply internationally. The problems this causes were first considered in the late
nineteenth century, which ultimately led to the signing of the Paris Con
v
ention. Howe
v
er,
greater strides were made in the twentieth century: not only was the Con
v
ention amended a
number of times, but in
1
970 the Patents Cooperation Treaty (PCT) was adopted. The effect of
this treaty was that a single patent application could be made, which in effect notifies
signatory countries of the applicantâs intent to file nationally. As Chart 2.2 suggests, this has
pro
v
ed popular, but it still requires the applicant to prosecute the application separately at
each national office during the so-called ânational phaseâ.
Patents
24
The Gowers Review
3
Intellectual Property and the Scale of the Market
, Boldrin M. and Levine D., 2004.
4
Counterfeiting and piracy: Frequently Asked Questions
, European Commission Press Releases, 2005.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.8
For o
v
er 30 years, there has been the ambition to create a unitary âCommunity Patentâ
for Europe to reduce costs for business. There ha
v
e been many failed attempts to broker
agreement. The most recent attempt failed o
v
er the issue of the legal status of translation of
the claims of the patent. The âLondon Agreementâ contains proposals that would simplify the
translation requirements of the current regime, but it has not yet been ratified by sufficient
Member States to take effect.
2.9
Separately, the European Patent Litigation Agreement (EPLA) is being discussed as an
integrated judicial system with uniform rules of procedure and a common appeal court for
patent litigation throughout Europe. This was first suggested in
1
999 but continues to face
difficulties.
2.10
Some international differences are the result of continuing disagreements o
v
er the
optimal policy. For example, the USA pro
v
ides patent protection for business methods as a
spur to inno
v
ation in enterprise. In contrast, policy makers within the EU ha
v
e to date seen
business method patents as unnecessary, and e
v
en inimical to business inno
v
ation.
2.11
For copyright, as with patents, the rights exist indi
v
idually in each country. Howe
v
er,
v
arious Con
v
entions ha
v
e set minimum standards of protection that must be afforded to
creators. The original, and still most important con
v
ention, is the Berne Con
v
ention, which
gi
v
es protection to the authors of works. It now has
1
62 signatories, including the UK. The
adoption of the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) Copyright Treaty in
1
996
created further minimum le
v
els of protection for authors. This, in combination with the
Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights Agreement (TRIPS), means that authors
enjoy a
v
ery high le
v
el of protection worldwide. The owners of related rights (e.g. performers,
producers of sound recordings and broadcasters) are also protected by international treaties,
namely the Rome Con
v
ention and the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty (WPPT).
Copyright
25
The Gowers Review
Chart 2.2: Demand for patent rights worldwide
20,599,488
14,644,800
23,497,954
17,062,058
12,294,536
10,011,805
7,659,426
5,265,755
14,744,746
12,527,841
10,068,860
7,451,674
Source: Trilateral Statistical Report, 2004 and 2005.
Total
PCT
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.12
At the EU le
v
el, there ha
v
e been substantial mo
v
es towards harmonisation of
copyright and related rights. Most notably, in
1
995 the term of protection was harmonised.
Ne
v
ertheless, differences remain between the Member States in, for example, what
constitutes a film or the standard of originality.
2.13
As noted in Chapter
1
, within the EU, trade mark law has been harmonised by the
Trade Marks Directi
v
e,
5
and a Community Trade Mark (CTM) has been introduced.
6
Internationally, UK firms benefit from the Madrid Protocol
7
which pro
v
ides a
semi-integrated mechanism for obtaining trade marks globally. Similarly, the law of registered
designs has also been harmonised across the Community
8
and in 2002 unregistered and
registered Community Designs were introduced.
9
In relation to designs there is also a treaty,
the Hague Agreement, which enables a designer to obtain global protection more easily,
1
0
Both the Community Design and the Community Trade Mark pro
v
ide a relati
v
ely cheap and
effecti
v
e mechanism for achie
v
ing protection throughout the Community.
2.14
The most significant recent de
v
elopments in IP policy ha
v
e centred on the World
Trade Organization (WTO) with the signing of TRIPS in
1
994. Looking to reduce barriers to
trade, the signatories set out a timetable for all WTO signatories to reach minimum standards
co
v
ering all IP rights. This includes undisclosed information and minimum standards for
enforcement, and remedies to be a
v
ailable for the infringement of rights.
2.15
In addition to simplifying the process of obtaining rights, international efforts ha
v
e
also sought to tackle piracy and counterfeiting. The laws relating to the criminal infringement
of copyright and trade marks ha
v
e both been tightened o
v
er recent years. Recently the
Enforcement Directi
v
e
11
came into force, strengthening ci
v
il sanctions, and a second directi
v
e
dealing with criminal sanctions has been proposed by the European Commission and is
currently being negotiated.
T E C H N O LO G I C A L C H A N G E
2.16
Rapid technological change o
v
er the last thirty years has pro
v
ided an enormous
number of new and inno
v
ati
v
e goods and ser
v
ices. This has simultaneously pro
v
oked many
challenges for UK policy, not least concerning IP. This section describes three substantial
technological shifts that ha
v
e affected the IP system, and how policy has altered as a result.
First, the digitisation of information and the ability to store it electronically has made it far
easier to copy, distribute and re
v
erse engineer products. Second, the inno
v
ation process has
become more networked and complex, with greater collaboration between firms, and with
high-tech projects often requiring the combination of thousands of indi
v
idual IP rights.
Third, new technologies such as genetics, software and databases require IP protection but do
not fit easily into existing categories.
Piracy and
counterfeiting
WTO / TRIPS
Trade marks and
designs
26
The Gowers Review
5
Directive 89/104/EEC to approximate the laws of the Member States relating to trade marks.
6
Council Regulation (EC) No. 40/94 on the Community Trade Mark.
7
The Protocol relating to the Madrid Agreement which was adopted in 1989. The UK has never been a party to the
Madrid Agreement itself.
8
Directive 98/71/EC on the legal protection of designs.
9
Council Regulation (EC) No. 6/2002 on the Community Design.
10
Although the UK is not a party to the Agreement, the EU is in the process of ratifying it and when it does so it will give
British businesses the right to use the mechanism.
11
Directive 2004/48/EC on the enforcement of IP rights.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
D i g i t i s a t i o n
2.17
Digital technology is increasingly common in UK households. The ownership of
home computers rose from 2
1
per cent of households in the UK in
1
99
1
to 58 per cent in
2003.
1
2
The capability of digital communications has also de
v
eloped rapidly. In April 2003,
8 per cent of British households had a broadband Internet connection, which had risen to
3
1
per cent by July 2005. The number of subscribers is expected to pass
1
2 million by 2008, as
shown in Chart 2.3 below, by which time the UK is expected to ha
v
e the largest number of
broadband subscribers in Europe.
1
3
2.18
As Chart 2.4 illustrates, high-speed digital networks are expanding the digital
distribution for films, music and games, but the ability to copy and distribute information at
v
irtually zero cost has also made it much easier to copy that information without permission
from the copyright owner. âPiracyâ of protected material has always been a concern for rights
holders. Howe
v
er, the unprecedented technological ad
v
ances of the last decade or so mean
that it has become an e
v
en more pressing threat. Downloading music and films from the
Internet is now the most common legal offence committed by young people aged between
1
0
and 25 in the UK .
1
4
Up to 80 per cent of music downloads are not paid for
1
5
e
v
en though most
consumers recognise it to be illegal.
1
6
According to a report commissioned by the British
Phonographic Industry (BPI), file-sharing cost the music industry ÂŁ4
1
4 million in lost sales in
2005,
1
7
on total retail sales of ÂŁ
1
.87 billion.
1
8
These losses ha
v
e risen steeply from ÂŁ278 million
in 2003.
Unauthorised
copying
27
The Gowers Review
Source: Ovum, January 2006.
Chart 2.3: UK broadband household penetration estimates
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Per cent
12
Office of National Statistics.
13
Screen Digest Research: European Piracy Fact Sheet
, 2004 (accessed at http://www.mpaa.org/piracy.asp).
14
Fraud and Technology Crimes
, Home Office, 2006 â http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs06/rdsolr0906.pdf.
15
Observer Music Monthly
(UK Downloaders, July 2005).
16
OTX presentation, January 2006: 63 per cent of downloaders recognised that downloading was illegal, 19 per cent
were not sure.
17
TNS, 2006, commissioned by BPI.
18
DCMS data, 2006.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.19
In response to this e
v
er-greater ease of copying files, firms ha
v
e de
v
eloped
technological protection systems that use encryption to restrict access to the film or music
file. This pre
v
ents users from copying D
V
Ds to their personal computers, and is also
commonly used to disable the fast-forward button during the initial minutes of a D
V
D film.
The use of Technical Protection Measures (one type of Digital Rights Management) has been
partially successful at reinstating technical impediments to copying media, but it has faced
consumer opposition and software tools to âcrackâ the protection are widely a
v
ailable on the
internet.
2.20
Re
v
erse engineering is the process of disco
v
ering the technological principles of an
application or de
v
ice through analysis of its structure, function and operation. It has
historically been difficult, but it is becoming easier for two reasons:
1
9
â˘
as engineering techniques become more computerised, more of the design
relies upon pre-programmed libraries of components. Therefore, recognisable
blocks of code or groups of circuit elements often occur in many designs
de
v
eloped using the same computer program. These are easier to recognise
and interpret than a customised product; and
â˘
artificial intelligence techniques for pattern recognition ha
v
e ad
v
anced to the
point where these blocks of code and other structures within a product can be
recognised automatically.
2.21
Re
v
erse engineering is often a necessity for reliable computer software design and
thus has become more important in recent years with the increased de
v
elopment of software.
But these changes also make it easier to copy and appropriate the IP within software and
other applications, which costs firms sales.
Reverse
engineering
28
The Gowers Review
Source: British Phonographic Industry.
Chart 2.4: Downloads share of singles sales in the UK by week
2004-2006
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
2006
2005
2004
Per cent
19
Reverse Engineering, Musker D.,
Protecting and Exploiting Intellectual Property in Electronics
, 1998.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
N e t w o r k e d i n n o v a t i o n
2.22
Technological change has also enabled inno
v
ation to become increasingly
collaborati
v
e. In traditional models of inno
v
ation, firms undertook most of their research and
de
v
elopment in-house. IP was occasionally sought for new in
v
entions, but often the
in
v
entions were kept secret. In this âclosedâ model, if a firm could not utilise an inno
v
ation in
an end product it was lost.
20
2.23
Increasingly firms are adopting an âopenâ approach to inno
v
ation, licensing useful
technologies from (âin-licensingâ) and to (âout-licensingâ) other firms,
2
1
as shown in Chart 2.5
abo
v
e. This model means that firms capture the
v
alue of ideas e
v
en if they do not use them in
an end product, which in turn increases the incenti
v
es to inno
v
ate. IP allows this sharing by
conferring property rights and enabling a market to form. Firms are increasingly licensing IP
as they focus on more specialised components. This approach can be seen in the
telecommunications industry, where a typical mobile phone now contains thousands of
patented in
v
entions and requires collaboration between hundreds of companies. Some firms,
such as ARM in Cambridge, do not produce any physical product and are entirely funded by
income from licensing. As Chart 2.6 shows, pharmaceutical companies are spending
increasing proportions of their R&D budgets on licensing and this is projected to increase.
2.24
Efficient licensing ensures liquidity in the market for ideas. Howe
v
er, licensing
patents can be complicated and costly. It is estimated that
1
5 per cent of patents granted in
the UK are âsleepingâ: the owner is willing to license but is pre
v
ented by the associated legal
costs.
22
The Institute of Patentees and In
v
entors report that around 95 per cent of attempts to
licence IP by indi
v
iduals or SMEs result in failure.
23
Large corporations can utilise greater in-
house IP knowledge and the bargaining power of a large IP portfolio when completing
licensing negotiations, generally leading to a greater success rate.
Licensing is
costly
Collaboration has
increased
29
The Gowers Review
Source: QuickMBA.com.
Chart 2.5: Models of innovation
'closed'
'open'
Traditional model: unused research
Greater collaboration: less research wasted
Research
Development
Time
Research
Development
Time
20
âOpen Innovationâ Myths, Realities, and Opportunities
, Chesbrough H., 2006.
21
Open Innovation: The New Imperative for Creating and Profiting from Technology
, Chesbrough H., 2002.
22
IPR at the Crossroads â Economic Value of IPR for Business in the Internal Market
, Nooteboom E., 2006.
23
Call for Evidence submission, Institute of Patentees and Inventors.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.25
In response to the growing need to licence technology and the associated transaction
costs, firms ha
v
e used patent pools as a mechanism to manage large numbers of rights
together. The case study below illustrates how this has worked for one technology.
2.26
Worldwide re
v
enues from patent licensing increased from $
1
5 billion in
1
990 to $
11
0
billion in 2000.
24
The BBC reports that ÂŁ230 million is spent a year on the acquisition of IP
rights from programme contributors in BBC-produced programmes alone
25
and IBM
generates between $
1
.5 billion and $2 billion in re
v
enue per year by licensing its non-core IP.
26
Patent pools
reduce licensing
costs
30
The Gowers Review
Source: McKinsey survey of large pharmaceutical companies, 2004.
Chart 2.6: Licensing spending as percentage of pharmaceutical
R&D spending
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2009 (projected)
2004
1999
More than 20 per cent
10 to 20 per cent
Less than 10 per cent
Percentage of pharmaceutical companies
Box 2.1: Case Study â RFID patent pool
a
A patent pool has been constructed by a consortium of twenty providers of the new
technology of radio frequency identification (RFID). The pool is intended to reduce the
confusion over patent royalties, reduce risks for end users and provide a convenient way
for rights holders to manage their IP. The consortium charges one royalty fee and divides
the revenue among the patent holders according to the rights held. This is likely to keep
the cost of RFID equipment down, which will encourage adoption by consumers. To join
the pool, a company or individual must hold patents deemed essential to the relevant
standard.
a
RFID Vendors to Launch Patent Pool, Roberti M,
RFID Journal
, 2005.
24
Intellectual Property â A Power Tool for Economic Growth
, WIPO, 2003.
25
Call for Evidence submission, BBC.
26
Identifying and Managing Intellectual Property Risk and the Use of Insurance as a Risk Management Tool,
Cauthorn K.,
Fordham Annual Conference, 2006.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.27
Collaboration between uni
v
ersities and businesses has increased markedly o
v
er the
last twenty years. Chart 2.7 shows that many UK uni
v
ersities created technology transfer
offices only in the late
1
990s;
27
by 2003, 80 per cent had at least one dedicated person; and staff
numbers continue to rise by almost 25 per cent each year. IP licensing rates and income ha
v
e
increased: UK uni
v
ersities earned licensing income worth ÂŁ22.4 million in 2002, an increase
of 2
1
per cent on the pre
v
ious year, as the le
v
els of technology transfer acti
v
ity, funding and
staffing grew.
28
2.28
Digital technology has changed not only the types of products consumers can buy,
but also their role in the
v
alue chain. The traditional assumptions of the role of consumers in
inno
v
ation is that they can choose between products but ha
v
e little say o
v
er design or
creation of those products other than through market demand.
2.29
As the costs and barriers to sharing and changing content ha
v
e fallen, users ha
v
e
grouped together into networks. These networks enable pre
v
iously passi
v
e consumers to
become adaptors and inno
v
ators themsel
v
es.
29
The broad spectrum of consumers in society
means that this type of consumer-led inno
v
ation can be extremely creati
v
e. A balanced IP
framework must encourage user inno
v
ation while protecting the in
v
estment of firms.
30
Consumers are
engaged in
innovation
Businessâ
university
collaboration
31
The Gowers Review
Source: Lambert Review of BusinessâUniversity Collaboration.
Chart 2.7: Number of UK universities creating technology
transfer offices, 1971â2003
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1971
1973 1975 1977 1979 1981 1983 1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995 1997 1999 2001 2003
Year
Number of universities
27
Lambert Review of BusinessâUniversity Collaboration
, HM Treasury, 2003.
28
Licensing Survey
, Association of University Technology Managers (AUTM), 2003.
29
Creating Selves: Intellectual Property and the Narration of Culture
, Gibson J., 2006.
30
The User Innovation Revolution
, Leadbeater C., 2006.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
N e w t e c h n o l o g i e s
2.30
The IP system, with four core rights, co
v
ers an enormous
v
ariety of inno
v
ation and
creati
v
e expression. Ne
v
ertheless, new technologies do not always fit comfortably within the
existing classes of IP protection. For example, computer programs are written as an original
expression but they are also intended to be industrial applications, so they do not fit squarely
within either the boundaries of copyright or patent law. Databases are collections of facts,
which ha
v
e traditionally not been co
v
ered by copyright law. Ne
v
ertheless the construction of
databases often requires substantial resources and so there would be no incenti
v
e to in
v
est
without legal or technical ways to pre
v
ent others from copying the information. Finally, with
regard to the legitimacy of patents on genes, the line between what is created and what is
disco
v
ered has been hotly contested. Almost 20 per cent of human gene DNA sequences are
patented; 4,382 out of the 23,688 known human genes.
3
1
I P p o l i c y r e s p o n s e s t o t e c h n o l o g i c a l c h a n g e
2.31
In response to the changes in recent years, a number of actions ha
v
e been taken at UK
and international le
v
els.
2.32
In 2003, as part of the implementation of the Information Society Directi
v
e,
32
certain
types of on-line copyright infringement were criminalised.
33
The maximum sentence for
committing the offence is two years imprisonment, which contrasts with infringements in the
âphysical worldâ where the maximum penalty is ten years imprisonment.
2.33
The Lambert Re
v
iew of BusinessâUni
v
ersity Collaboration led to fi
v
e model Research
Agreements being de
v
eloped. These agreements were launched in February 2005 and ha
v
e
already been used successfully by a number of organisations, sa
v
ing time and money and
adding to certainty. For example, GlaxoSmithKline and the Uni
v
ersity of Hertfordshire
concluded a successful negotiation in just two days and GlaxoSmithKline has already put in
place 27 agreements. The agreements ha
v
e also pro
v
ed useful for SMEs.
34
32
The Gowers Review
Box 2.2: Case Study â The Sims collaboration
The Sims game from Electronic Arts was launched in 2000 and quickly developed into an
online community, with players swapping tools, software and artefacts to put into their
online houses. Hundreds of websites now display hundreds of thousands of collectible items
that are available to the millions of players. Electronic Arts estimates that 90 per cent of
the content of the game is not created by the gameâs original authors but by a large
innovative sector of the playing community.
A gameâs official release is the moment when the innovation initiative passes from the in-
house development team to the community of player-developers. Ideas flow back and
forth, among the players and between the players and the company.
31
Intellectual Property Landscape of the Human Genome, Jensen K. and Murray F.,
Science
, 14 October 2005.
32
Directive 2001/29/EC on copyright in the information society.
33
See sections 107(2A) and 198(1A) of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 (CDPA).
34
Innovating for Success: The Intellectual Property Review and Economic Competitiveness
, Lord Sainsbury, 2006.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
2.34
Regarding re
v
erse engineering for software de
v
elopment, there are specific
exemptions co
v
ering such acti
v
ity in UK law.
35
In the main, the Information Society Directi
v
e
36
prohibits any circum
v
ention of technical protections such as encryption, e
v
en in some
instances, where they pre
v
ent uses permitted by fair dealing exceptions.
2.35
Currently, only if computer programs ha
v
e a âtechnical effectâ can they be patented in
Europe. Howe
v
er, there is little authoritati
v
e definition of this phrase, and its scope is widely
contested. This has led to some computer programs being patentable in one country, such as
the USA, but not patentable in the Member States of the EU. Recent attempts to agree a
Directi
v
e to harmonise the law relating to software patents was rejected by the European
Parliament in response to fears about the negati
v
e implications that a US-style system for
software patents would ha
v
e on inno
v
ation.
2.36
To protect the in
v
estment in databases, the EU established a new type of right specific
to databases,
37
but the
v
alue of pro
v
iding the right is still widely disputed by users of the
system.
2.37
In the EU, a protracted debate pro
v
oking strong and di
v
ergent
v
iews led to a directi
v
e
on the protection of biotechnological in
v
entions.
38
Contro
v
ersy still surrounds the granting of
patents on biotechnological in
v
entions. In part this is because of confusion about the effect
of patent protection on future inno
v
ation and concern about the patentability of technology
in
v
ol
v
ed. While some Member States ha
v
e se
v
erely restricted the grant of protection for
biotechnological in
v
entions on moral grounds, the UK has established a clear policy and
practice which has fostered a strong domestic biotechnology industry, particularly around
stem-cell research.
33
The Gowers Review
Box 2.3: Case Study â Biotechnology patent disputes â Harvard
Oncomouse
The Harvard Oncomouse is an example of a disputed biotechnology patent. The mouse
had been genetically modified to contain a cancer-causing gene. The patent was filed and
granted by the United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO). It was filed in Europe
in 1985 and initially rejected in 1989 as, among other reasons, the European Patent
Convention (EPC) excludes patentability of animals.
a
The patent was then granted in 1992
on appeal as it was decided that only animal
varieties
were excluded, not animals
themselves. It was then opposed by several parties, the proceedings eventually concluding
in 2003 to allow the patent in an amended form.
b
In Canada, the Supreme Court rejected
the patent in 2002, ruling that higher life forms are not patentable.
c
a
Harvard/Oncomouse
(1990) EPOR 4.
b
Harvard/Oncomouse
(2003) OJEPO 473.
c
See:
Commissioner of Patents v. President and Fellows of Harvard College
[2002] 4 S.C.R. 45.
35
Sections 50A to 50C of the CDPA.
36
See Article 7 of Directive 2001/29/EC.
37
Directive 96/9/EC on the legal protection of databases.
38
Directive 98/44/EC on the legal protection of biotechnological inventions.
C
H A L L E N G E S A N D
O
P P O R T U N I T I E S
2
I N C R E A S I N G I M P O R TA N C E O F I P
2.38
In todayâs knowledge economy, IP has ne
v
er been more important for securing
Britainâs prosperity and has ne
v
er been more challenged by the changing context of
inno
v
ation: it is estimated that 70 per cent of a typical companyâs
v
alue lies in its intangible
assets, up from around 40 per cent in the early
1
980s;
39
and the number of patent applications
ha
v
e more than doubled at the EPO in the last ten years.
2.39
While the number of registered IP rights has increased, the
v
aluation of IP remains
largely subjecti
v
e and a specialist field. Traditional accounting methods only allow the
inclusion of IP on the balance sheet when it has been bought rather than de
v
eloped in-house.
Proposals to update International Accounting Standards to reflect the
v
alue of intangible
assets are currently under discussion.
2.40
Despite IPâs increasingly central importance to the UK economy, consumer
knowledge of IP is low. A MORI poll on IP and UK public attitudes
40
showed that awareness of
the phrase âIntellectual Propertyâ is generally low, with many respondents ha
v
ing to guess
what âIntellectual Propertyâ meant. Participants were more knowledgeable about IP that is
obser
v
able, such as trade marks, than more abstract forms of IP, such as patents.
2.41
When briefed as to what IP rights were, participants in the MORI sur
v
ey felt that they
were often used exploitati
v
ely by companies and in an anticompetiti
v
e manner. IP crimes
such as piracy and buying counterfeit goods were seen as â
v
ictimlessâ with no guilt associated
to buying fake goods at low prices. Fear of buying potentially harmful goods, such as fake
pharmaceuticals, was stronger: they saw the enforcement of standards and the protection of
consumer rights as the most important aspects of IP policy.
C O N C LU S I O N
2.42
Globalisation and technological change are profoundly changing the world economy.
Knowledge capital is more important than e
v
er, and so too is IP. While the changing context
has pro
v
ided new business opportunities, it has also created new challenges, both for
businesses that rely on IP and the IP system itself. The following chapter will examine in
greater detail how well the system has performed amid the challenges of the modern
economy.
Consumer
awareness is low
IP valuation
remains difficult
Use of IP has
increased
34
The Gowers Review
39
Identifying and Managing Intellectual Property Risk and the Use of Insurance as a Risk Management Too
l, Cauthorn K.,
Fordham Annual Conference, 2006.
40
Intellectual Property: Public Attitudes
, MORI, 2000.
3
P
E R F O R M A N C E
The Gowers Review
3.1
The first chapter laid out the shape of the Intellectual Property (IP) system. The
pre
v
ious chapter showed how global and technological changes ha
v
e created significant new
challenges for the IP system. This chapter will assess the aggregate effecti
v
eness of the system
that we ha
v
e, and will identify areas where problems exist.
3.2
The goal of this Re
v
iew is to ensure that the UK has a producti
v
e and equitable IP
system that ser
v
es the needs of its users and makes the rewards of inno
v
ation accessible to
all. This chapter will consider how well the system operates in practice.
3.3
There are few standard measures that can be used to quantify the performance of the
IP system, but a number of qualitati
v
e indicators ha
v
e informed the Re
v
iewâs conceptual
framework for judging performance. These indicators ha
v
e been constructed from the large
number of responses to the Re
v
iewâs Call for E
v
idence, as well as inter
v
iews, case studies and
international comparisons.
T H E P E R F O R M A N C E F R A M E W O R K
3.4
There are three components that together fashion an IP system that fosters
producti
v
ity and ensures equitable outcomes for industry and consumers:
(
1
)
the
instruments
of IP, namely patents, copyright, designs, trade marks and sui
generis rights, ought to be balanced, coherent and flexible;
(2)
the
operations
, i.e. the award, use and enforcement of those IP rights, must be
efficiently administered; and
(3)
the national and international organisations responsible for the
governance
of policy and operations must be clear and well run.
3.5
The performance of the first two components is discussed in more detail below. The
go
v
ernance of policy and operations is discussed in Chapter 6.
I n s t r u m e n t s
3.6
On the one hand, IP rights pro
v
ide economic incenti
v
es to inno
v
ate, but on the other
hand, the exclusi
v
e rights they confer to achie
v
e this allow monopoly prices and associated
welfare losses. So there is a trade-off between incenti
v
es on one side and costs to consumers
and limited access for follow-on inno
v
ators on the other. It is therefore crucial to strike the
right balance in the system.
3.7
IP rights a
v
ailable within the UK must be both internally and externally coherent.
They must co
v
er the myriad ways in which knowledge is applied and ideas protected. They
must also be integrated with other national and international systems of rights, particularly
in light of globalisation. Moreo
v
er, there should be certainty and consistency in rights.
In
v
estment in knowledge-based industries should be grounded in a predictable legal
framework for the protection of that knowledge. Finally, rights should be intelligible to the
general public not just to IP specialists.
Coherence
Balance
Satisfied users
are a good
indication of
success
35
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.8
The pre
v
ious chapter examined the impact that globalisation and technological
change ha
v
e had on the IP system. It is
v
ital that in both the rights and the exceptions to those
rights, which limit the control of the rights owner, the IP system is robust and flexible enough
to cope with technological and en
v
ironmental changes and so to continue to facilitate
inno
v
ation and continue to retain public support.
O p e r a t i o n s
3.9
The way in which IP rights are awarded must be affordable, transparent, swift,
consistent and accessible to all users. Awarded rights must not be so broad as to stymie
inno
v
ation by pre
v
enting others from engaging in similar areas of research, nor so narrow as
to pro
v
ide no practical protection from competitors.
3.10
It should be as easy as possible to buy, sell, license, securitise (grouping rights
together into a tradable asset) and obser
v
e IP rights, both within the UK and for UK firms
abroad. Moreo
v
er, competition authorities must ha
v
e the ability to curb any abuse of
monopoly power stemming from IP rights.
3.11
IP rights are only useful if rights owners are able to enforce their rights, whether on
their own, through the ci
v
il courts or through law enforcement agencies such as trading
standards or the police. IP crime must carry penalties proportionate to the harm caused and
the risk of being caught. The costs of dispute resolution should be reduced by greater
a
v
ailability and use of alternati
v
e dispute resolution.
G o v e r n a n c e
3.12
It is
v
ital that the organisations responsible for administering, enforcing and setting
policy for IP are well run and effecti
v
ely integrated. Without adequately functioning bodies,
the IP system will not function in the way users expect.
PAT E N T S
3.13
Patents granted in the UK pro
v
ide the proprietor with an exclusi
v
e right for twenty
years. There are a number of features of patent laws to allow wider access to the information
protected by the patent. Applications are normally published eighteen months after being
filed,
1
theoretically enabling others to ha
v
e access to all the technical information about the
in
v
ention. Applicants ha
v
e an incenti
v
e to make the disclosure of technical information as
limited as possible, but in the UK the process of dialogue between applicants and examiners
to achie
v
e clarity about the in
v
ention appears to work well. Similarly academic researchers
are protected by an exception co
v
ering experimental use that enables researchers to examine,
test and build upon in
v
entions. Howe
v
er, many respondents to the Call for E
v
idence noted
that the scope of the exception is unclear in light of the increasingly commercial nature of
transactions between uni
v
ersities and businesses. O
v
erall, the balance of patents appears to
be broadly satisfactory.
Balance
Enforcement
Use
Award
Flexibility
36
The Gowers Review
1
Applications claiming priority will be published earlier. Furthermore, patents which include information that might affect
national security are not published.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.14
Responses to the Call for E
v
idence confirm that, in general, the UK patent system is
clearly defined, applied consistently and aligned with other IP rights. The patentability of
software remains contested, with applications required to pro
v
e a âtechnical effectâ, but this
does not appear to ha
v
e had a significant negati
v
e effect on industry inno
v
ation. The
harmonisation of international patent systems lags behind other forms of IP, not least in
Europe, as discussed in the pre
v
ious chapter. This continues to impede the operational
integration of the award and enforcement of patents and to increase business costs.
3.15
In the face of enormous technological and economic changes, the rights granted by a
patent ha
v
e changed remarkably little o
v
er the past twenty years. Users of the system confirm
that patents ha
v
e ne
v
ertheless been a flexible tool able to absorb new technologies and
pro
v
ide protection for new and emerging industries. For some technologies, such as
pharmaceuticals, additional specific rights (such as supplementary protection certificates)
ha
v
e been de
v
eloped to address particular regulatory issues. Howe
v
er, the absence of a new
right for e
v
ery new technology has been a strength of the system and has pre
v
ented a
spiralling complexity of rights and boundary conditions of those rights.
H o w e f f i c i e n t l y d o p a t e n t s o p e r a t e ?
3.16
Many submissions to the Call for E
v
idence highlighted the expense of gaining patent
protection, and, in particular, high translation costs and professional fees for patent agents in
Europe and internationally. The official fees charged by the UK Patent Office for processing
an application are lower than those of many other national patent offices, but costs are dri
v
en
up by the expense of legal fees and ad
v
isory ser
v
ices. There are a number of routes to
obtaining patent protection in the UK and internationally, which has created a complex
system and significant confusion outside specialist practitioners. Approximately 70 per cent
of businesses sur
v
eyed by the Confederation of British Industry (CBI) were unaware that
patent protection in the UK did not secure their in
v
ention in other countries.
2
3.17
The speed of the patent award process is hampered at both the US Patent and
Trademark Office (USPTO) and the European Patent Office by large backlogs that impose
delays of up to three years on applications. The UK Patent Office is unusual in ha
v
ing almost
no waiting list for patents, but ne
v
ertheless due to the nature of the granting process, few
patents are awarded in less than eighteen months. This is not a problem for many industries,
but in the high-tech and internet, sectors where business cycles are comparati
v
ely short, a
long grant time can impose the cost of uncertainty on competitors as to whether a particular
in
v
ention is proprietary or not.
3.18
Finally, regarding the quality of patents awarded, respondents were generally
satisfied with the rigour of both the UK Patent Office and the European Patent Office in their
examination procedure. One study estimated that between 83 per cent and 98 per cent of
patent applications were granted in the USA.
3
In contrast, only about two-thirds of
applications are granted at the UK and European Patent Offices. Se
v
eral users noted that the
quality of examination, particularly for new technologies such as biotechnology where prior
art may not be well documented, could be impro
v
ed by introducing mechanisms for experts
in industry and academia to obser
v
e and oppose patents at the pre-grant stage to ensure that
granted patents are not o
v
erly broad in their application.
Award
Flexibility
Coherence
37
The Gowers Review
2
CBI China Survey.
3
Continuing Patent Applications and Performance at the US Patent and Trademark Office, Quillen C., Webster O. and
Eichman R.,
Federal Circuit Bar Journal
, 12, 35, 2002.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.19
Patents pre
v
ent ri
v
als copying proprietary technology. Howe
v
er, research suggests
that this only tends to be the case for firms where there are a
v
ery small number of patents per
product, for example in pharmaceuticals. Cohen et al. show that 65 per cent of firms in
complex technologies use patents as a trading strategy to licence a technology (while only
1
2
per cent use patents as a fence). In simple technologies, 28 per cent of firms use patents as a
trading strategy to licence a technology, while 46 per cent use patents to fence off an area to
competitors and pro
v
ide more intellectual âspaceâ to inno
v
ate.
4
This strategy can be
problematic in areas where thousands of patents are used in the design of new products,
especially in the electronics and software industries. The US litigation between RIM and NTP
o
v
er technology used in BlackBerry de
v
ices illustrated that where the process in
v
ol
v
es the
automatic use of âinjuncti
v
e reliefâ (a court order to shut down production and use of the
application containing the contested patent) indi
v
idual patents held by small firms become
v
ery powerful e
v
en if they only play a small part in the whole application. UK courts ha
v
e
appeared pragmatic in this area, judging cases on their indi
v
idual merits. While injuncti
v
e
relief is a
v
ailable, judges are also willing to award specified damages rather than stop
production as the means of recompense.
3.20
For many years, patent legislation has pro
v
ided for the renewal of a patent for a
reduced fee in exchange for the condition that the patentee must licence the technology for
a reasonable fee on request from a third party. This is not well ad
v
ertised or widely used at
present, and firms appear largely unaware of its existence. Another mechanism for fostering
the use of patented technology has been the Lambert Model Agreements, which were
designed to facilitate uni
v
ersityâbusiness technology transfer. These ha
v
e worked well and
are shortly to be extended to Europe.
3.21
A key aspect of enforcing rights is the existence of credible legal sanctions. Howe
v
er,
costs can be prohibiti
v
e, particularly for small firms. A firm challenging a patent can expect
to pay ÂŁ750,000 for a simple case, largely due to the costs of the ad
v
ersarial system. Liability
for the other sideâs costs could double this to ÂŁ
1
.5 million. Defending a European patent can
mean multiple actions in se
v
eral jurisdictions, as each European patent is a series of separate
national patents subject to national jurisdictions. As well as increasing legal costs, it increases
uncertainty, with different jurisdictions on occasion coming to different decisions on the
same case.
Enforcement
Use
38
The Gowers Review
Box 3.1: Broad patents can stunt competition
Blackboard, a US maker of online learning management systems, recently took the
academic community by surprise when it announced it had been granted a broad patent
in the USA. The patent covers 44 claims related to learning management systems and
implicated infringement by many other products on the market. On the same day that it
publicly disclosed its patent, Blackboard started a patent infringement suit in a Texas court
against Desire2Learn.
a
Many companies that have been working on educational software
are now concerned that Blackboard will either sue for infringement or enforce complex
and expensive licensing agreements.
a
Patent battle over teaching tools
, BBC website http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/technology/4790485.stm, 2006
4
Protecting Their Intellectual Assets: Appropriability Conditions and Why US Manufacturing Firms Patent (or Not)
,
Cohen
W., Nelson R. and Walsh J.,
Management Science
, 2002.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.22
The high cost of litigation means that most cases settle out of court. In the USA, which
has e
v
en higher costs, only
1
.5 per cent of all patents are e
v
er litigated, and 0.
1
per cent of all
patents are litigated to trial.
5
A series of inter
v
iews with small European firms found that
many small firms could not afford the high litigation costs necessary to defend their patents.
6
Moreo
v
er, the lack of cases going to trial means there is a paucity of patent case law,
increasing the general uncertainty around the application of statute.
C O P Y R I G H T
3.23
There has been much academic and popular debate around the optimal length of
copyright. A balanced copyright system would be one in which the length of protection
equals the necessary incenti
v
e to produce a creati
v
e work. Gi
v
en the
v
ariety of incenti
v
es that
stimulate artistic endea
v
our, and the number of different classes of work that copyright
protects, e
v
erything from paintings to musical scores, it is not possible to arri
v
e at any
definiti
v
e optimal length. Ne
v
ertheless, future increases, or decreases, to the length of
copyright should certainly be dependent on economic e
v
idence that such a change would be
positi
v
e. In any case, as a result of the international treaties to which the UK is a signatory and
the responsibility of the European Commission for this area of policy, the UK can make no
unilateral change to the length of copyright and is bound by strong minimum standards.
3.24
The UK copyright system is hea
v
ily connected with international treaties that ha
v
e
achie
v
ed a high le
v
el of harmonisation across the world. This has some positi
v
e aspects. For
example, there is a requirement in the Berne Con
v
ention that there should be no mandatory
registration of work for copyright to come into force. This greatly reduces administrati
v
e
costs. Con
v
ersely, as a result of the centralised nature of policy control, small adjustments to
the system can take many years.
3.25
Copyright protects many different types of subject matter, from literary, dramatic,
musical, artistic and cinematographic works to computer programmes, databases, sound
recordings and broadcasts. Copyright protecting different classes of work is subject to
different domestic and international treaties. Although this reduces the coherence in the
copyright system, coherence across all types of copyright may restrict the balance in the
system as not all copyright works are deemed eligible for the same style of protection. For
example, the term of protection for typographical arrangement, that is, the arrangement of
words on a page, is currently 25 years, compared with the life of creator plus 70 years for
literary works. The term of protection is intended to reflect the creati
v
e effort required, which
would not be reflected in a blanket harmonisation of term.
3.26
Copyright in the UK presently suffers from a marked lack of public legitimacy. It is
percei
v
ed to be o
v
erly restricti
v
e, with little guilt or sanction associated with infringement.
While the law is complex, this is not principally a problem of coherence, but of a lack of
flexibility to accommodate certain uses of protected material that a large proportion of the
population regards as legitimate and which do not damage the interests of rights holders.
Flexibility
Coherence
Balance
39
The Gowers Review
5
Probabilistic Patents, Lemley M. and Shapiro C.,
Journal of Economic Perspectives,
2005.
6
Innovation Needs Patent Reform, Kingston W.,
Research Policy
, 2001.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.27
UK copyright law pro
v
ides a number of âexceptionsâ to the broad rights granted to the
owner of a copyright work to enable âreasonableâ use to be made of the work freely and
without permission. While the public are generally unaware of these exceptions (some of
which fall under the rubric of âfair dealingâ), perhaps the best-known example is the rule of
thumb that an indi
v
idual may photocopy an excerpt from a book of not more than one
chapter, or 5 per cent (whiche
v
er is the least), without infringing copyright. While the
exceptions are restricted to particular acts, the USA has a similar doctrine of âfair useâ which
is more flexible in its application.
3.28
As discussed in the pre
v
ious chapter, ad
v
ances in digital copying technology and the
expectations of consumers ha
v
e outstripped the liberties granted by copyright law. A good
example of this is consumers copying music from CDs onto their MP3 players. Many do this
unaware that they are infringing copyright. Music Ally, a research and analysis consultancy,
estimates that by the first quarter of 2006,
1
billion iTunes files and 50 million iPods had been
sold, equating to twenty iTunes per iPod. Gi
v
en that iPods can store upward of
1
,000 songs,
there is a question as to where most of the music on iPods is coming from.
3.29
The fact that the letter of the law is rarely enforced only adds to the public sense of
illegitimacy surrounding copyright law. Yet copyright is essential for protecting the
in
v
estment that UK creati
v
e industries make in artists, performers and designers. If uses such
as transferring music from CDs to an MP3 player for personal use are seen to be illegal, it
becomes more difficult to justify sanctions against copyright infringement that genuinely
cost industry sales, such as from freely downloading music and films using the Internet.
3.30
Another issue affecting the flexibility of copyright is the use of old material where the
copyright owner is not known and cannot be found. In the absence of permission, any use is
infringement, and therefore many potential users will not use material for fear of legal
recriminations. Many submissions to the Call for E
v
idence highlighted this as a large
problem, noting that a large amount of content protected by copyright is not commercially
a
v
ailable. The existence of such a large
v
olume of old work protected but una
v
ailable
(estimates of up to 98 per cent of published work under copyright) means that a great amount
of intellectual capital is wasted. Firms and indi
v
iduals are unable to restore, rework or re
v
i
v
e
these âorphanâ works to create new commercial and creati
v
e capital.
H o w e f f i c i e n t l y d o e s c o p y r i g h t o p e r a t e ?
3.31
Copyright is not formally awarded, but automatically exists in a work once it is
created. As noted abo
v
e, the absence of any registration makes the award of copyright
v
ery
efficient and accessible, but as there is no register of who owns the copyright, it can be
difficult for third parties to reuse old works.
3.32
Copyright licences for commercial work are either managed under contract directly
between the user and the rights holder, or alternati
v
ely by âcollecting societiesâ which act as
intermediaries between copyright owners in particular industries and users. For example, the
Educational Recording Agency collects licence re
v
enue from schools and distributes it as
royalty payments to publishers. Licences can be as specific as granting unlimited pri
v
ate use
of CD (with âunauthorised copying, lending, hiring, public performance and broadcast of the
recordingâ being prohibited
7
), or as broad as the Phonographic Performance Limited (PPL)
broadcasting licence, which sa
v
es radio stations from ha
v
ing to negotiate indi
v
idual licences.
The system of licensing effecti
v
ely reduces the transaction costs of e
v
ery copyright holder
separately arranging for their work to be used and paid for in each instance. But it is also
marked by a lack of competition, with, for example, one collecting society setting a royalty rate
for a blanket commercial radio licence for playing music.
Use
Award
40
The Gowers Review
7
Similar wording can be found printed around the edge of most commercially sold CDs.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.33
âCreati
v
e Commonsâ licences pro
v
ide an alternati
v
e operating model that has been
particularly popular for non-commercial online licensing of digital media. The date of
creation and the permissions that the copyright holder grants to others using the work are
contained within an easily comprehensible licence, which is a
v
ailable online and is machine-
readable so that it can be automatically processed.
3.34
While criminal and ci
v
il legal sanctions against copyright infringement are tough,
infringement is extremely common. Approximately 3.5 million adults in the UK bought a total
of 35â40 million counterfeit CDs in 2005.
8
Copyright infringement has increased as the
capabilities of technology and digital networks ha
v
e grown, and piracy is now a significant
drag on the performance of UK creati
v
e industries. Total losses to the film industry in 2005 are
estimated at ÂŁ7
1
9 million on industry box office and
v
ideo sales of ÂŁ3.5 billion.
9
Enforcement
through the ci
v
il courts is costly, and cases are difficult to pro
v
e. Trading Standards, the police
and the Serious Organised Crime Agency are all aware of the problem, but it remains one of
many competing priorities.
T R A D E M A R K S
3.35
Trade marks are badges of identity that may be used to brand a company, product or
process. The balance inherent within trade marks is that other parties cannot use the mark to
mislead consumers, but they can use the mark to point towards that particular brand. For
example, comparati
v
e ad
v
ertising, where one firm uses the otherâs mark to publicise the
superior features of its own product, is permitted, whereas claiming that oneâs own products
are genuine trade mark protected goods (counterfeiting) is illegal. The current system
appears to be well balanced.
3.36
There is e
v
idence that the
v
alue of firms is positi
v
ely related to incidence and
intensity of trade mark acti
v
ity.
1
0
Greenhalgh and Rogers also argue that a firmâs producti
v
ity
is positi
v
ely associated with its trade mark acti
v
ity, and this is more pronounced in ser
v
ice
sector firms than for manufacturing.
11
A study by Griffiths et al. indicates that a companyâs
stock of trade marks is associated with greater firm profits, controlling for other types of IP
and tangible/intangible assets.
1
2
This suggests that trade marks are creating
v
alue for firms,
and that the system is broadly working well for rights holders.
3.37
There is high le
v
el of international similarity between trade mark systems, and a
harmonised unitary âCommunity Trade Markâ which protects across the whole of the
European Community. Recent changes to both trade mark and design law
1
3
ha
v
e increased
the number of the areas in which there is o
v
erlap (for example both now protect distincti
v
e
shapes and signs) but the acts of infringement and the duration of the rights remain distinct
and accordingly the o
v
erlap is not seen as a significant practical problem by businesses.
Coherence
Balance
Enforcement
41
The Gowers Review
8
Music Piracy in Great Britain
, IPSOS, 2006.
9
IPSOS, 2005, from BVA tracking study. This is calculated by assuming that some proportion of pirated content would
have been purchased from the content provider. The full value of content is therefore greater than ÂŁ719 million.
10
Trade Marks and Productivity in UK Firms
, Greenhalgh C. and Rogers M., Oxford Intellectual Property Research Centre
Working Paper Series No 12, December 2005 http://www.oiprc.ox.ac.uk/EJWP1205.html.
11
Ibid.
12
The Effects on Firm Profits of the Stock of Intellectual Property Rights
, Griffiths W., Jensen P. and Webster E., Melbourne
Institute of Applied Economic and Social Research Working Paper No. 4/05, 2005.
13
Trade Marks Act 1994 and Council Regulation 6/2002 on the Community Design.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
3.38
The recent increase in the classes of mark eligible for protection is a positi
v
e
reflection of the responsi
v
eness of policy to changing business marketing practices. The other
positi
v
e indication of the flexibility of the trade mark system is that the protection granted to
marks reflects popular usage. Trade marks are struck off the register and lose protection once
they become generic or if they are not acti
v
ely used. As such, the system works well to ensure
that once a trade mark is no longer functioning as an identifier, it is no longer protected as
such.
H o w e f f i c i e n t l y d o t r a d e m a r k s o p e r a t e ?
3.39
Trade marks are affordable. Howe
v
er, they can take between six and nine months to
be granted. There is currently no âfast-trackâ route a
v
ailable for firms that require protection
more quickly in order to start building up their brand.
3.40
Brand owners in their respones to the Call for E
v
idence raised concerns that copycat
packaging (especially from supermarkets) threatened their brands and was unfair
competition, and that the hurdle of âconsumer confusionâ required to pro
v
e trade mark
infringement was too difficult to pro
v
e in court.
3.41
There are large problems with the counterfeiting of trade marks. Similar issues exist
in relation to trade mark enforcement as to copyright, namely the fact that the police ha
v
e
many competing priorities and that litigation is costly.
R E G I S T E R E D A N D U N R E G I S T E R E D D E S I G N R I G H T S
3.42
There were no issues raised with the Re
v
iew regarding the balance of designs.
3.43
There are a number of different design systems that o
v
erlap; this o
v
erlapping can
cause significant confusion within industry. The same design may be protected by se
v
en
distinct IP rights
1
4
as well as the common law protection of âpassing offâ. It is particularly
confusing that the Unregistered Design in the UK is different both in scope and in length from
the Community Unregistered Design. For example, the Community Unregistered Design only
lasts three years. In addition, the threshold for infringement of the UK Unregistered Design is
far higher than for the Community Unregistered Design.
3.44
Despite the o
v
erlap between the different rights, the UK has a thri
v
ing design
industry. The UK has a reputation as a centre for excellence in design: it is the top exporter of
design worldwide and has the fourth largest designer fashion industry in the world.
1
5
UK firms
are frequent users of the Community Registered Design system, with
1
0 per cent of all
applications from 2003 to 2005.
1
6
3.45
As with trade marks, the recent increase in the classes of design eligible for protection
is a positi
v
e reflection of the responsi
v
eness of policy to changing business marketing
practices.
Flexibility
Coherence
Balance
Enforcement
Use
Award
Flexibility
42
The Gowers Review
14
UK Registered Design, UK Unregistered Design, Community Registered Design, Community Unregistered Design, plus
UK trade mark, Community Trade Mark and copyright.
15
Mapping Document
, DCMS, 2001. Accessed at: http://www.culture.gov.uk/creative/pdf/part1.pdf.
16
Statistics of Community Designs
, OHIM, 2006.
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
H o w e f f i c i e n t l y d o e s t h e d e s i g n s y s t e m o p e r a t e ?
3.46
UK registered designs are awarded quickly and cheaply and are a popular method of
protection, but as Chart 3.
1
below indicates, following the 2003 launch of the Community
Registered Design, the total number of designs registered in the UK has fallen from 9,000 in
2002 to less than 4,000 in 2005. Howe
v
er, this is not a problem and reflects the greater
geographical co
v
erage of the Community Registered Design. So far, there ha
v
e been no calls
from industry to disband the UK Registered Design.
3.47
There were no issues raised with the Re
v
iew regarding the use of designs.
3.48
In spite of the multitude of rights protecting designs, se
v
eral submissions noted that
in practice it is extremely difficult to stop designs being copied. The legal mechanisms to
enforce design rights are complex. The common law protection of passing off, which may
protect an established design to which goodwill has attached, cannot normally be used to
stop somebody copying a new design. The uncertainty of the law and the limitations of
passing off mean that small designers cannot afford to take the risks associated with legal
action and, accordingly, competitors ha
v
e no economic incenti
v
e to seek permission before
using the design. Anti Copying in Design (ACID) estimate that many designers are forced out
of business e
v
ery year by legal costs or lost sales due to infringement.
S U I G E N E R I S R I G H T S
3.49
Sui generis rights protect specific sorts of inno
v
ation where the broader rights
discussed abo
v
e are inappropriate for some reason. For example, Supplementary Protection
Certificates were introduced by the European Community to compensate for the increasing
length of clinical trials that was reducing the amount of market time under patent protection
for drugs. There were no major problems raised in the responses to the Call for E
v
idence
regarding either the selection of instruments or the way in which those instruments operate.
Enforcement
Use
Award
43
The Gowers Review
Source: UK Patent Office.
Chart 3.1: UK Registered Design applications, 1989â2005
0
2,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
10,000
12,000
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
1992
1991
1990
1989
Year
Total designs registered
P
E R F O R M A N C E
3
C o n c l u s i o n s
3.50
This chapter has outlined a framework for a successful IP system, and has identified
the key objecti
v
es of IP policy and operations to ensure that patents, copyright, trade marks
and designs foster producti
v
ity and equity. Table 3.
1
below summarises the performance of
the aspects of the system that ha
v
e been discussed. The chapter has outlined a number of
problems, and the following chapters will analyse issues in the policy, operations and
go
v
ernance of IP in depth and make targeted, practical recommendations in response.
44
The Gowers Review
Table 3.1: IP performance scorecard
Instruments
Balanced
Patents
Copyright
Trade marks
Designs
Coherent
Flexible
Award
Use
Enforcement
Operations
High performance
Medium performance
Low performance
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
â
~
â
â
â
â
~
~
â
â
~
~
4
I
N S T R U M E N T S
The Gowers Review
4.1
This chapter is concerned with the instruments of Intellectual Property (IP); patents,
copyright, trade marks and designs. It is split into three sections setting out the characteristics
that the instruments should exhibit:
â˘
balance
; the instruments should ensure that the incenti
v
e to inno
v
ate is
balanced against the ability of follow-on inno
v
ators to access knowledge;
â˘
coherence
; the instruments should be clear and consistent; the scope of rights
should not change retrospecti
v
ely in order to ensure trust in the system; and
the international system should promote inno
v
ation in all countries; and
â˘
flexibility
; the instruments should be flexible in order to respond to the
changing economic en
v
ironment and the needs of rights holders and users.
4.2
Chapter 3 highlighted the impact of global and technological changes on the
economy as whole, and in particular on businesses who use IP. This chapter makes
recommendations to ensure that the instruments of the IP system are able to respond to
these challenges. The instruments should embody the principles of balance, cohence and
flexibity.
B A L A N C E
4.3
IP rights are a trade-off between incenti
v
es and access. On the one hand, IP rights pro
v
ide
economic incenti
v
es to inno
v
ate, but on the other hand, the exclusi
v
e rights they confer to achie
v
e
this allow monopoly prices and associated welfare losses. So there is a trade-off between incenti
v
es
on one side and costs to consumers and limited access for follow-on inno
v
ators on the other. It is
therefore crucial to strike the right balance in the system. This section focuses on the exceptions to
rights, which enable follow-on inno
v
ators to build on protected ideas to de
v
elop new inno
v
ations.
C l a r i f y i n g t h e p a t e n t r e s e a r c h e x c e p t i o n
4.4
Research exceptions grant researchers the freedom to conduct research on patented
in
v
entions for the purposes of understanding and impro
v
ing existing products and processes
without the need to get permission. This exception reduces the transaction costs in
v
ol
v
ed in
clearing rights for use of patents in experimentation and research. The number of patented
materials required to conduct experiments is often so great that the transaction costs of
obtaining licenses for all of them are prohibiti
v
e. In addition to the experimental use
exception, there are exceptions for pri
v
ate use and non-commercial use.
1
4.5
It is not entirely clear what uses fall within the scope of the experimental use
exception. Uses in relation to the subject matter of a patent are generally co
v
ered by the
exception, while uses relating to different subject matter are not co
v
ered by the exception.
Confusion arises because there is no definition of what is in relation to, and what is different
from the subject matter. Some technologies, such as genes, may fall into both categories.
4.6
There is
v
ery little case law on what amounts to experimental use. This leads to
uncertainty as to its scope. A paper by the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI) and the
Intellectual Property Institute (IPI) found that the law on research exemption was widely
seen as unclear and in need of clarification.
2
The paper also found that small research groups
in particular lose out under the existing law, for fear of facing a costly lawsuit. The lack of
clarity may dissuade researchers, who are fearful of infringing a patent and being sued as a
Exceptions are
unclear
45
1
Section 60(5)(a) of the Patents Act 1977.
2
Patents for Genetic Sequences: the Competitiveness of Current UK Law and Practices
, IPI on behalf of the DTI, 2004.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
result. E
v
idence from the USA indicates that, under its research exception, on a
v
erage one in
six scientific research projects is stopped or ne
v
er started as a result of the grant of IP rights.
3
It is imperati
v
e that research is not similarly impeded in the UK.
4.7
In addition to uncertainty o
v
er the scope of the exception, there are also instances
where licences ha
v
e been sought and high fees ha
v
e been demanded. In one study
1
9 per cent
of academics reported access to research materials was refused when sought.
4
As stated in
Chapter 2, the number of patents granted has risen dramatically and in certain areas of
technology, âpatent thicketsâ ha
v
e de
v
eloped. There is concern that follow-on inno
v
ation will
be stifled by the cumulati
v
e royalty demands of patent holders or by fear of infringement.
4.8
The experimental use exception is also relied upon in relation to plant patents. Many
plants are created from samples of other plants. For plant breeders, all experimentation with
a patented plant means reproducing it. This is an infringing act.
5
4.9
E
v
en if the second generation plant does not infringe the scope of the patent, the
research that created that plant might be found to ha
v
e infringed the patent. This can act as
a powerful disincenti
v
e to experiment on patented plants. This was recognised in the
Biotechnology Directi
v
e, which pro
v
ided that compulsory licences should be a
v
ailable for
those new plants that demonstrate a technical ad
v
ance.
6
Howe
v
er, the British Society of Plant
Breeders reports, that this pro
v
ision is âineffecti
v
e in the UK at leastâ, because to pro
v
e
ad
v
ance the product must actually be created, thereby infringing the patent. The IIP notes its
concern that âthe UK law on research exemption does not clearly allow plant breeders to
make a cross with a
v
ariety with a patented gene sequence in it and to de
v
elop a new
v
ariety
without that gene in itâ.
7
Germany and France ha
v
e introduced an exception as part of their
implementation of the Biotechnology Directi
v
e, which pre
v
ents breeders being sued for
de
v
elopment of new
v
arieties.
4.10
The requirement that research is âpri
v
ateâ is problematic; it is no longer sufficient for
uni
v
ersities because they are increasingly conducting research in collaboration with pri
v
ate
organisations. Furthermore, there is concern that if only research that is ânon-publicâ is
exempt, then publicly funded research that is, as a condition of funding, disclosed may also
not qualify for the research exception.
Plant research
46
The Gowers Review
Box 4.1: Swiss research exception
The effects of a patent do not extend:
(a) to acts undertaken in the private sphere for non-commercial purposes
(b) to acts undertaken for experimental and research purposes in order to obtain
knowledge about the object of the invention, including its possible utilities; in
particular all scientific research concerning the object of the invention is permitted
(c) to acts necessary to obtain a marketing authorisation for a medicament according
to the provisions of the law of 15 December 2000 on therapeutic products.
(d) to the use of the invention for the purpose of teaching in teaching establishments
(e) to the use of biological material for the purposes of selection or the discovery and
development of a plant variety
(f) to biological material obtained in the field of agriculture which was due to chance
or which was technically unavoidable
3
Do Formal Intellectual Property Rights Hinder the Free Flow of Scientific Knowledge? An Empirical Test of the Anti-Commons
Hypothesis
, Murray F. and Stern S., 2004.
4
View from the Bench: Patents and Material Transfers
, Walsh J., Cho C. and Cohen W.,
Science
, vol 309, 2005.
5
According to the Biotechnology Directive 98/44EC.
6
Article 12 of Directive 98/44/EC on the legal protection of biotechnological inventions.
7
Patents for Genetic Sequences: the Competitiveness of Current UK Law and Practices
, IIP on behalf of the DTI, 2004.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.11
The experimental use exception should be clarified to enable researchers to examine,
learn from and impro
v
e upon in
v
entions. The Swiss research exception, which was recently
changed, pro
v
ides a good example of a clearer exception.
4.12
The Re
v
iew belie
v
es that clarifying the research exception along Swiss lines will foster
research without damaging the interests of rights holders.
C o p y r i g h t e x c e p t i o n s f o r e d u c a t i o n
4.13
As discussed in Chapter 3, one of the purposes of exceptions to copyright is to reduce
burdensome transaction costs associated with ha
v
ing to negotiate licences. Thus, the
exceptions enable educational establishments to pro
v
ide high quality teaching without
ha
v
ing to clear e
v
ery indi
v
idual use.
4.14
The existing exceptions to copyright
8
enable teachers to copy printed material on an
ad hoc basis and to show off-air recordings where no licensing arrangement is in place.
9
The
rele
v
ant licensing arrangements for off-air recordings are made by the Educational
Recording Agency (ERA). The licences are similar to those issued to commercial radio stations
by Phonographic Performance Limited (PPL) and Mechanical Copyright Protection
Society/Performing Rights Society (MCPS/PRS). An educational institution buys a licence
from the ERA and then does not need to clear the rights to copy a recording of a
particular broadcast or to show the programme in a particular case, as long as it is within the
terms of the licence. Similarly, for reprographic works, educational establishments ha
v
e
licences with the Copyright Licensing Agency that enable teachers to photocopy material on
an ad hoc basis.
4.15
Currently, the education exceptions set out in the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act
1
988 (CDPA) are too limited for the digital age, where information is no longer confined to
textbooks but can be shared o
v
er electronic whiteboards and computer networks. The
exceptions also do not apply to secure
v
irtual learning en
v
ironments (
V
LEs) or networked
computers or âintelligent whiteboardsâ within educational establishments. The Re
v
iew agrees
with the
v
iew presented by the Open Uni
v
ersity in its submission that educational exceptions
should be defined by intent, category of use and acti
v
ity and not by media or location.
1
0
4.16
In the absence of copyright exceptions, rights to copy, show or otherwise use the work
would ha
v
e to be cleared with the right holder. Howe
v
er, e
v
en with the current exceptions,
clearance is time consuming and expensi
v
e. A sur
v
ey of educational institutions found that:
â˘
90 per cent of respondents had to chase rights holders for permission, and the
a
v
erage number of items chased per institution per annum was 97;
â˘
1
2.5 per cent of requests for permission to use material were ne
v
er answered;
and
â˘
fees of up to ÂŁ7.55 per article were charged in the print en
v
ironment. For 300
students this results in a cost of ÂŁ2,265.
11
Copyright
exceptions exist
for educational
purposes
47
The Gowers Review
8
Sections 32 to 36A of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 (CDPA).
9
Section 35 of the CDPA.
10
Call for Evidence submission, Open University.
11
Clearing the Way: Copyright Clearance in UK Libraries,
Gadd E, 2001.
Recommendation 1:
Amend section 60(5) of the Patents Act 1977 to clarify the research
exception to facilitate experimentation, innovation and education.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.17
In order therefore to ensure that educational establishments are able to take
ad
v
antage of new technology to educate pupils regardless of their location, it is necessary to
expand the existing copyright exceptions. At present an educational establishment can copy
a broadcast work (e.g. a radio or tele
v
ision programme) and show it to its students without
infringing copyright pro
v
ided the acti
v
ity is for a non-commercial educational purpose.
1
2
In
2003 the exception was modified so that educational establishments could allow students on
the premises to see the programme in their own time.
1
3
Howe
v
er, the exception does not
extend to situations where students are not on the premises of the educational establishment.
This means that distance learners are at a disad
v
antage compared with those based on
campus and thus these constraints disproportionately impact on students with disabilities
who may work from remote locations.
4.18
The exception should therefore be expanded so that copyright is not infringed where
a copy of a broadcast (e.g. a tele
v
ision programme) is communicated to students who are not
located within the educational establishment.
1
4
It is the Re
v
iewâs
v
iew that such an exception
is permitted under the Information Society Directi
v
e, pro
v
ided that the education pro
v
ided is
not commercial and any source is indicated.
1
5
It will also be necessary to ensure that access to
such material should not be generally a
v
ailable to the public: accordingly, distance learning
students will need to access the material securely
v
ia a
V
LE.
4.19
At present it is also not an infringement of copyright for a non-commercial
educational establishment to make reprographic copies of passages from books or similar
material, pro
v
iding sufficient acknowledgements are made.
1
6
Howe
v
er, the exception only
applies where no licensing scheme co
v
ering this sort of acti
v
ity is in place. As mentioned
abo
v
e, the Copyright Licensing Agency (CLA) presently pro
v
ides such a licence and therefore
this exception has a limited impact. Howe
v
er, neither the exception nor the CLA currently
license short extracts being sent to distance learning students by email or in a
V
LE. This
disad
v
antages such students and makes it difficult for educational establishments to pro
v
ide
students with short extracts of study material. Accordingly, the rele
v
ant copyright exception
should be extended to allow passages from works to be made a
v
ailable to students by email
or
V
LE without infringing copyright.
1
7
Howe
v
er, right holders ha
v
e a legitimate interest in this
field and so such an exception should not ha
v
e effect where a licensing scheme is in place.
1
8
S o u n d r e c o r d i n g t e r m
4.20
The European Commission is re
v
iewing the length of copyright protection for sound
recordings in 2007 as part of the re
v
iew of the body of Community copyright law. Some
members of the UK record industry ha
v
e called for the Commission to increase retrospecti
v
ely
the term of copyright from the current 50 years to 95 years. That is, that the term of protection
should be extended for existing works that are already in copyright as well as future works. This
Educational
exceptions
should be
clarified
48
The Gowers Review
12
Section 35 of the CDPA.
13
Section 35(1A) of the CDPA.
14
This restriction is currently imposed by section 35(1A) of the CDPA.
15
Article 5(3)(a) of Directive 2001/29/EC. However, the Review is of the view the new extended exception should
continue not to apply where a licensing scheme is in place which covers such activities, in other words, section 35(2) of
the Act should apply to the extended exception as well.
16
Section 36 of the CDPA.
17
Such use would also fall within Article 5(3)(a) of Directive 2001/29/EC.
18
In other words, section 36(3) of the CDPA should apply to the extended exception as well.
Recommendation 2:
Enable educational provisions to cover distance learning and
interactive whiteboards by 2008 by amending sections 35 and 36 of the CDPA.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
extension would also apply to works that ha
v
e fallen out of copyright, but which would still be
in copyright if the longer term existed when they were created (the âretroacti
v
eâ re
v
i
v
al of
copyright).
1
9
4.21
Some companies and trade bodies in the UK record industry ha
v
e called for the UK
Go
v
ernment to support their submission to the Commission that copyright term on sound
recordings should be extended. The Re
v
iew consulted widely and has considered this proposal
in some detail, both for a retrospecti
v
e change in copyright term and for a prospecti
v
e change in
term that would only affect future recordings rather than those already in existence. As part of its
research into the question of term extension the Re
v
iew commissioned an economic analysis
from the Centre for Intellectual Property and Information Law (CIPIL) at Cambridge Uni
v
ersity.
4.22
A number of reasons were ad
v
anced in the Call for E
v
idence from some groups in
fa
v
our of extending the term of protection:
(
1
)
parity with other countries; in the USA, sound recordings are protected for 95
years. In Australia and Brazil the term of protection is 70 years;
(2)
fairness; currently composers ha
v
e copyright protection for life plus 70 years,
20
whereas performers and producers only ha
v
e rights for 50 years.
2
1
Such a
disparity is unfair;
(3)
extension of term would increase the incenti
v
es to in
v
est in new music; the
âincenti
v
es argumentâ claims that increasing term would encourage more
in
v
estment, as there would be longer to recoup any initial outlay;
(4)
extension of term would increase number of works a
v
ailable; copyright pro
v
ides
incenti
v
es for rights holders to make works a
v
ailable to the public as it gi
v
es rights
holders a financial incenti
v
e to keep work commercially a
v
ailable; and
(5)
maintain the positi
v
e trade balance; the UK has an extremely successful music
industry. The UK industry has between a
1
0 per cent and
1
5 per cent share of
the global market.
22
In 2004, the UK sector showed a trade surplus of ÂŁ83.4
million, earning ÂŁ238.9 million in export incomes.
23
The Re
v
iew has carefully considered each of these arguments in turn.
1 . E x t e n s i o n a c h i e v e s p a r i t y w i t h o t h e r c o u n t r i e s
4.23
It is important to note that the term of protection is only one factor determining the
royalties that artists and recording companies recei
v
e. The breadth of protection is also
important. In the EU, the term of protection for sound recordings and performersâ rights is
harmonised at 50 years.
24
During this period, rights holders recei
v
e royalties for almost all
public performances of their work. In the USA, the term of protection is 95 years, but under
the Bars and Grills Exception
25
around 70 per cent of eating and drinking establishments, and
45 per cent of shops, do not ha
v
e to pay royalties to performers.
26
In the USA, performers only
recei
v
e royalty payments when their music is played on digital radio,
27
while in the UK all
Extension is not
harmonisation
49
The Gowers Review
19
From this point forward, âretrospectiveâ will refer to both forms of backward changes to copyright.
20
Section 12 of the CPDA.
21
Section 191 and section 13A of the CDPA.
22
Department for Culture, Media and Sport.
23
Call for Evidence submission, British Phonographic Industry.
24
Article 3 of Directive 93/98/EEC on harmonising the term of protection of copyright and certain related rights.
25
Section 110(5) of the USA Copyright Act. A complaint was made by the European Community against the USA that this
exception was contrary to Article 13 of TRIPS. A panel found in favour of the EC and the USA was ordered to pay annual
damages of US$1.2 million. This requirement has now lapsed.
26
See WTO Panel Report WT/DS160R, Section 110(5) of the USA Copyright Act, 5 June 2002.
27
Section 106(6) of the USA Copyright Act.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
radio performances carry royalties.
28
If the system in the USA was the same as that in the EU,
estimates suggest that European rights holders would recei
v
e royalties of $25.5 million per
annum for the broadcasting of their recordings in the USA.
29
It is therefore possible that the
total royalties recei
v
ed in the EU is no less than, and may e
v
en be more than, those recei
v
ed
in the USA.
4.24
The argument has also been put forward that the longer length of term in the USA
encourages artists from the UK to sign to US recording companies, thereby remitting profits
to the USA. Howe
v
er, the Re
v
iew has seen no e
v
idence of UK bands choosing to sign to US
labels based on copyright term. If musicians are indeed signing to labels in the USA, there
may well be other reasons for doing so, such as the size of the market. In fact, there is
anecdotal e
v
idence that bands from the USA are signing to UK labels to de
v
elop in a
v
ibrant
music scene. For example, the Scissor Sisters are signed to Polydor UK, and their first album
sold 2.6 million copies in the UK, and only
1
30,000 in the USA. Orson, another American
band, achie
v
ed a number one single with âNo Tomorrowâ and is signed to Mercury Records
in the UK.
2 . Pe r f o r m e r s a n d c o m p o s e r s s h o u l d h a v e e q u a l
p r o t e c t i o n
4.25
Performers argue that the incenti
v
es to perform are no less than those required to
write lyrics or compose a score, and that the performance itself is a work of art. The distincti
v
e
v
oice and aesthetic of the performer adds
v
alue to the composition and is
v
ital to making a
song a commercial success.
4.26
But the fairness argument applies to society as a whole. Copyright can be
v
iewed as a
âcontractâ between rights owners and society for the purpose of incenti
v
ising creati
v
ity. As
MacCauley argued in
1
84
1
, âit is good that authors should be remunerated; and the least
exceptionable way of remunerating them is by a monopoly. Yet monopoly is an e
v
il. For the
sake of the good we must submit to the e
v
il; but the e
v
il ought not to last a day longer than is
necessary for the purpose of securing the goodâ.
30
If the exclusi
v
e right granted by copyright
(or indeed any other form of IP right) lasts longer than it needs to, unnecessary costs will be
imposed on consumers.
4.27
Economic e
v
idence indicates that the length of protection for copyright works
already far exceeds the incenti
v
es required to in
v
est in new works. Boldrin and Le
v
ine
3
1
estimate that the optimal length of copyright is at most se
v
en years. Posner and Landes,
eminent legal economists in the field, argue that the extra incenti
v
es to create as a result of
term extension are likely to be
v
ery small beyond a term of 25 years.
32
4.28
Furthermore, it is not clear that extending term from 50 years to 70 or 95 years would
remedy the unequal treatment of performers and producers from composers, who benefit
from life plus 70 years protection.
4.29
This is because it is not clear that extension of term would benefit musicians and
performers
v
ery much in practice. The CIPIL report that the Re
v
iew commissioned states
that: âmost people seem to assume that any extended term would go to record companies
rather than performers: either because the record company already owns the copyright or
Fairness applies
to society as a
whole
50
The Gowers Review
28
In relation to sound recordings this is a result of section 20 of the CDPA. In relation to performances, this is the
combined effect of sections 182CA and 182D of that Act.
29
TRIPS and the Fairness in Music Arbitration: The Repercussions, Owens R.,
European Intellectual Property Review
, 2003.
30
MacCauley, Thomas Babington, Speech to House of Commons on 5 February 1841.
31
Growth and Intellectual Property
, Boldrin M. and Levine D., 2005.
32
The Economic Structure of Intellectual Property Law,
Landes W. and Posner R., 2003.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
because the performer will, as a standard term of a recording agreement, ha
v
e purported to
assign any extended term that might be created to the copyright holderâ.
33
The British
Phonographic Industry (BPI) submitted a report by PricewaterhouseCoopers (PWC) to the
Re
v
iew.
34
Using the maximum re
v
enues predicted in the PWC report, CIPIL estimated that the
net present
v
alue (NP
V
) of a prospecti
v
e change in term would be
1
per cent or lower for
performers. The report noted that distribution of income would be highly skewed, with most
income going to the relati
v
ely small number of highly successful artists whose work is still
comercially a
v
ailable after 50 years.
51
The Gowers Review
Box 4.2: Artists would not necessarily benefit from extension
In theory, artists would receive payment for an increased period of time. The PWC report
indicates that performers obtain 50 per cent of public performance income. However, the
amount that performers receive from CD sales is set by a âgreater variety of contractual
arrangements between artists and record companies than ever beforeâ.
a
But, the
âadvanceâ that creators receive is determined by contract and bands have to pay back the
record company for initial investment. Eighty per cent of albums never recoup costs and
so no royalties are paid to the creator.
b
As shown in the charts below, on average creators
receive a very low percentage of royalties from recordings. If the purpose of extension is
to increase revenue to artists, given the low number of recordings still making money 50
years after release, it seems that a more sensible starting point would be to review the
contractual arrangements for the percentages artists receive.
It is worth noting that length of term of protection on sound recordings and performance
rights is not the only source of revenue. Performers receive pecuniary benefits beyond the
return on the sale of their creations, by using celebrity status to make money. For example,
performers may choose to appear in advertising campaigns or to sell branded
merchandise, and the value that they bring to the advertising campaign is derived from
their creative works.
a
Call for Evidence submission, British Phonographic Industry.
b
www.music-law.com/contractbasics.html.
Source: MCPS/PRS Alliance.
CD sale
revenue distribution
Download sale
revenue distribution
45%
9%
46%
15%
68%
9%
8%
Creators
Retailers
Record company
Creators
Digital service provider (DSP)
Record company
Credit card charge
Chart 4.1: Revenue Distribution
33
Review of the Economic Evidence Relating to an Extension of Copyright in Sound Recordings
, Centre for Intellectual Property
and Information Law, 2006.
34
The Impact of Copyright Extension for Sound Recordings in the UK
, PricewaterhouseCoopers, 2006.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
3 . E x t e n s i o n w i l l i n c r e a s e t h e s u p p l y o f n e w m u s i c
4.30
In
v
estment decisions are typically based on the expectations of future returns.
Therefore, in order for the incenti
v
e argument to hold, it must be shown that prospecti
v
e
extension of copyright term for sound recordings would increase the incenti
v
es for record
companies to in
v
est in new acts.
4.31
In an amicus brief to the Supreme Court in the challenge to the Copyright Term
Extension Act,
35
se
v
enteen economists, including fi
v
e Nobel Prize winners, estimate that
extension for new works creates at most
1
per cent
v
alue for a twenty year prospecti
v
e
extension (using NP
V
calculation) and they conclude therefore that extension of term has
negligible effect on in
v
estment decisions.
36
Furthermore, they noted that the then term of
protection in the USA had nearly the same present
v
alue as perpetual copyright term. As
such, many economists suggest that increasing copyright term beyond 50 years does not
pro
v
ide additional incenti
v
es to in
v
est, as monies earned so far in the future fail to impact on
current spending decisions.
4.32
The incenti
v
es argument is sometimes applied to artists as well as to record
companies. That is, if musicians were to recei
v
e royalties for an additional period of time, they
would ha
v
e more incenti
v
es to make music. This seems highly unlikely gi
v
en there are a large
number of bands already creating music without any hope of a financial return. Da
v
e
Rowntree, drummer with Blur and The Ailerons, commented that: âI ha
v
e ne
v
er heard of a
single one [band] deciding not to record a song because it will fall out of copyright in âonlyâ
fifty years. The idea is laughable.â
37
4.33
E
v
idence suggests that most sound recordings sell in the ten years after release, and
only a
v
ery small percentage continue to generate income, both from sales and royalty
payments, for the entire duration of copyright. Before becoming a signatory to the Berne
Con
v
ention the USA operated a system where copyright had to be applied for and renewed.
Between
1
923 and
1
942, there were approximately 3,350,000 copyright registrations.
Approximately
1
3 per cent of these were renewed. If current law had applied between
1
923
and
1
942, 3.35 million works would ha
v
e been blocked to protect 77,000 commercially
v
iable
works.
38
In a system where all works recei
v
e protection for the maximum term, the
v
ast
majority of works remain in copyright despite not being economically
v
iable for the rights
holder. Without registration, it is difficult to get accurate estimates of the percentage of works
protected in the UK by copyright that are commercially a
v
ailable. Box 4.3 below shows that
the
v
ast majority of income for sound recordings and books are generated within the first few
years of issue. Therefore, extension would only raise re
v
enue for a small minority of sound
recordings, keeping the
v
ast majority locked up.
Most recordings
do not sell for 50
years
Extension will
not increase
incentives
52
The Gowers Review
35
Eldred v. Ashcroft
(2003) 537 USA 186.
36
The Copyright Term Extension Act of 1998: An Economic Analysis
, Akerlof, G. et al., 2002.
37
Call for Evidence submission, Dave Rowntree.
38
Brief for Petitioners at 7,
Eldred
v.
Ashcroft
, (2003) 537 USA 186.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
53
The Gowers Review
Box 4.3: The commercial life of most creative works is very short
a
Chart 4.2 indicates that the vast majority of income generated by sound recordings comes
from those released since 1999. Therefore, the increased revenue from extension would
be small, but would affect well-known artists.
A similar pattern appears for books as shown in Chart 4.3 below:
These sales shapes, and data from the USA Library of Congress, suggest that the majority
of sales are from new releases, and that the majority of works do not have enduring
commercial value. However, extension would impact all works â not just those that
continue to be commercially successful.
a
The Copyright Term Extension Act of 1998: An Economic Analysis,
Akerlof, G. et al., 2002.
Chart 4.2: Income by release year as percentage of total
income, 2004
35
30
30%
67%
3%
25
20
15
10
5
0
P
ercentage of total income
Source: Phonographic Performance Limited and PricewaterhouseCoopers.
1955
1957
1959
1961
1963
1965
1967
1969
1971
1973
1975
1977
1979
1981
1983
1985
1987
1989
1991
1993
1995
1997
1999
2001
2003
Source: Neilson Book Scan.
Chart 4.3: Sales of fiction in first year of publication
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
0
Hardback fiction titles
Paperback fiction titles
Week post publication
Books per week
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4 . M o r e m u s i c w o u l d b e a v a i l a b l e t o c o n s u m e r s
4.34
Extension would impact on all recordings. It would keep works in copyright e
v
en
when they are not generating any income for rights owners. One study found that parties
without legal rights ha
v
e made more historic US recordings a
v
ailable than ha
v
e rights
holders. Furthermore, rights holders reissue recent works while largely ignoring earlier
music.
39
Of the sound recordings published between
1
890 and
1
964, an a
v
erage of
1
4 per cent
had been reissued by the copyright owner, and 22 per cent by other parties.
40
These statistics
suggest that the costs of renewing copyright
4
1
or reissuing copyrighted material are greater
than the potential pri
v
ate return, but that these works may ha
v
e enduring social and
cultural
v
alue.
4.35
The lack of commercial a
v
ailability impacts upon consumers and users, but it is also
worth noting the impact this has for all creators and musicians. Chapter 2 noted the
increasing pre
v
alance of licensing and the complexity of rights clearance. If works are
protected for a longer period of time, follow-on creators in the future would ha
v
e to negotiate
licences to use the work during that extended period. This has two potential implications:
first, the estates and heirs of performers would potentially be able to block usage rights,
which may affect future creati
v
ity and inno
v
ation; and second, this would make tracing rights
holders more difficult. Thus extending term may ha
v
e negati
v
e implications for all creators.
Works in
copyright are
less available
54
The Gowers Review
39
Survey of Reissues of U.S. Recordings
, Brooks T., Aug 2005.
40
Ibid.
41
Which was a requirement of US law during the period that Brooks was studying.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
5 . T h e U Kâ s t r a d e b a l a n c e w o u l d i m p r o v e
4.36
The argument that the balance of trade would impro
v
e makes two assumptions; first,
that increasing term is necessary to recei
v
e longer terms in other countries; and second, that
because the UK is a net exporter of music, more money will flow in from foreign markets. The
CIPIL report argues that this is not the case.
4.37
Firstly, the term of protection depends on where a recording is played, not on where
it was produced; therefore term extension would only be beneficial to the balance of trade if
UK copyright owners were able to benefit from longer terms in other countries. Howe
v
er,
most countries outside Europe
42
, including the largest foreign markets for international
repertoire â the US and Australia â do not apply a âcomparison of termsâ to the protection
granted to sound recordings. This means that the term of protection offered in a foreign
country is not dependent on the country of origin of the sound recording. UK copyright
owners already benefit from the longer term offered in the USA and Australia where royalties
are collected from those countries, and the CIPIL report notes that changes in British law
would not now affect the term granted to British phonograms.
4.38
Secondly, the CIPIL report show that the US market, which is worth $
1
2,
1
53 million
43
,
comprises only 5 per cent of international repertoire. In comparison, the UK market, worth
$3,508.7 million includes 43 per cent of international repertoire. Thus whilst the UK music
industry is extremely successful, the UK is a substantial importer of sound recordings, and
Increasing term
will damage the
UK balance of
trade
55
The Gowers Review
42
Comparison of terms is required under Article 7 of Directive 93/98/EEC.
43
The Record Industry in Numbers, IFPI, '2005.
Box 4.4: Comparison of price and availability of books in copyright and
in the public domain
Evidence suggests that works that are protected by copyright are less available and more
expensive than works in the public domain. A study by Paul Heald looked at the price and
availability of âdurable booksâ â titles which retain their cultural and economic value and
continue to sell many copies. Under copyright, these books are more expensive than those
durable books that have passed into the public domain. Further study shows that works
that are protected by copyright are less available than those works in the public domain.
This suggests that extension would keep durable books at higher costs for a longer period
of time, and would make all works, including the most popular works, less available for
longer.
Source: Heald, Paul (2006). Property Rights and the Efficient Exploitation of Copyrighted Works: An Empirical Analysis of
PublicDomain (1906-1922) and Proprietary (1923-1933) Fiction Best Sellers (working draft).
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Lowest price
from Amazon
Ave. low price
(BIP) (Maj. Pub.)
Ave. low
price (BIP)
17 Durable PD books (1906â22) 19 Durable copyrighted books (1923â32)
Chart 4.4: Price comparison of durable public domain (PD) and
copyrighted books in print (BIP)
Cost in dollars
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
PD (1913â22)
166 books
Copyrighted (1923â32)
168 books
Availability (in print) in 2006
Per cent
Chart 4.5: Availability (in print) in 2006
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
therefore the extra re
v
enue from 43 per cent of international sound recordings sold would be
remitted o
v
erseas. In combination, extension to UK sound term would cause little additional
in-flows, but would increase remittances abroad. Therefore, as the CIPIL report concludes,
âincreasing copyright term at home from 50 to 70 or 95 years is likely to ha
v
e a
disproportionate, negati
v
e effect on the balance of trade.â
4.39
Increasing the length of sound term increases the length of time during which
royalties accrue. Once copyright in a sound recording ends, no royalties are due for that
recording, and fewer licences are required to play those songs (copyright in the composition
would continue, and therefore would continue to require a licence). PPL collects monies to
remunerate rights holders whene
v
er their sound recordings are played (see Chart 5.4 for more
details). In 2005 PPL collected ÂŁ86.5 million from
v
enues, premises and broadcasters to
remunerate rights holders.
44
The majority of this was collected from UK organisations and
broadcasters. Because the cost of the licences reflects the royalties payable on the copyrights,
as those copyrights expire, so the cost of the licences will fall. Term extension would keep the
cost of sound recording licences higher for longer. Extension would increase costs for all
businesses that play music, for example hairdressers, old peopleâs homes, local radio and
internet ser
v
ice pro
v
iders (ISPs). The impact of extension would therefore be felt throughout
the economy.
4.40
In conclusion, the Re
v
iew finds the arguments in fa
v
our of term extension
uncon
v
incing. The e
v
idence suggests that extending the term of protection for sound
recordings or performersâ rights prospecti
v
ely would not increase the incenti
v
es to in
v
est,
would not increase the number of works created or made a
v
ailable, and would negati
v
ely
impact upon consumers and industry. Furthermore, by increasing the period of protection,
future creators would ha
v
e to wait an additional length of time to build upon past works to
create new products and those wishing to re
v
i
v
e protected but forgotten material would be
unable to do so for a longer period of time. The CIPIL report indicates that the o
v
erall impact
of term extension on welfare would be a net loss in present
v
alue terms of 7.8 per cent of
current re
v
enue, approximately ÂŁ
1
55 million.
R e t r o s p e c t i v e c h a n g e s t o s o u n d r e c o r d i n g t e r m
4.41
As discussed abo
v
e, changes to the length of IP protection can be made
retrospecti
v
ely or prospecti
v
ely, and the Re
v
iew has considered the e
v
idence for both forms
of extension. This section will consider retrospecti
v
e changes to copyright.
4.42
Copyright is a contract between creators and society; once the work has been created,
altering the length of term of protection changes the terms of that contract. This is not fair for
consumers, as they would be forced to pay monopoly prices for longer than they had implicitly
accepted. The same logic applies to all forms of IP rights.
4.43
The principal argument that is put forward to increase sound term retrospecti
v
ely is
that many recordings from the
1
950s are beginning to fall out of copyright and that this will
lead to a loss of re
v
enue, therefore impacting on the incenti
v
es to in
v
est in newer artists. As
discussed earlier, in
v
estment decisions are made on the basis of expected future returns
rather than those already recei
v
ed. Furthermore, if music companies ha
v
e access to capital
Extension would
cost industry
56
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 3:
The European Commission should retain the length of protection
on sound recordings and performersâ rights at 50 years.
44
PPL Annual Report and Financial Statement
, 2006.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
markets future in
v
estment decisions will be entirely unaffected by the length of protection of
current works. Additional, anecdotal e
v
idence suggests that some new successful bands are
signed to relati
v
ely new record labels. For example Franz Ferdinand are with Domino
Records, which was founded in
1
993 and rarely re-releases records that predate itself, and the
Kaiser Chiefs are signed to B-Unique, founded in 2004.
4.44
The PWC report estimated that at most the NP
V
of a twenty-year retrospecti
v
e
extension for re
v
enue o
v
er the next 50 years would be around ÂŁ
1
56.
1
million, and for a 45 year
retrospecti
v
e extension, ÂŁ
1
63 million. Using PWCâs discount rate of
1
2 per cent, this equates
to approximately ÂŁ20 million per year. These figures represent
only a 1.8 per cent and 1.9 per
cent respectively increase in the present value of revenue from existing recordings
; e
v
en at
the upper bound, the increase in re
v
enues from existing recordings are
v
ery small in present
v
alue terms. Correspondingly, PWC estimates that performers would also
gain 1.9 per cent
re
v
enue in present
v
alue terms, and âthe distribution of this income will be highly skewed
with a relati
v
ely small number of performers of successful older works being the major
gainersâ.
4.45
If recording companies recei
v
e increased re
v
enue from an extension of copyright
term, that re
v
enue must come from somewhere. The PWC report performs an analysis of the
price differential of sound recordings in and out of copyright. The report concludes that there
is no statistically significant different between the a
v
erage prices of recordings that are
protected by copyright and in the public domain. PWC contend that if prices do not change
between works in and out copyright, then term extension will ha
v
e no impact on consumers.
Instead they suggest that those who make public domain recordings will benefit at the
expense of the former rights holders.
4.46
Howe
v
er, PWC note that there are problems with the data, such as the small sample
size. Many public domain recordings may not be a
v
ailable in the large retailers where the data
was sourced. They also note that as there are not a large number of popular recordings currently
in the public domain, relati
v
e to the number of recordings that will enter the public domain in
the coming years, there is no certainty that this obser
v
ed trend will continue. As sound
recordings of enduring popularity enter the public domain, economic theory suggests that
competition between many release companies will dri
v
e down the price, just as has occurred in
the public domain book market for classic literature. Therefore, the re
v
iew belie
v
es that most of
the increased re
v
enue from term extension would come directly from consumers who would
pay higher (i.e. monopoly) prices for longer. Working on the maximum producer gains from
sound term extension, the CIPIL report estimates that retrospecti
v
e extension would cost
consumers between ÂŁ240 million and ÂŁ480 million in net present
v
alue terms.
45
4.47
The additional re
v
enue for producers is likely to come from the most popular
recordings, which will ha
v
e a correspondingly high cultural
v
alue. Gi
v
en that a low number of
sound recordings or performances retain any commercial
v
alue beyond 50 years, extending
term to all these would lock up the majority of recordings that are not generating income,
rendering them una
v
ailable for consumers and future creators.
Costs to
consumers
57
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 4:
Policy makers should adopt the principle that the term and scope
of protection for IP rights should not be altered retrospectively.
45
Review of the Economic Evidence Relating to an Extension of Copyright in Sound Recordings
, Centre for Intellectual Property
and Information Law, 2006.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
C O H E R E N C E
4.48
The IP rights a
v
ailable within the UK must be both internally and externally coherent. They
must co
v
er myriad ways in which knowledge is applied and ideas protected, and must also be
integrated with other national and international systems of rights, particularly in light of
globalisation. Moreo
v
er, there should be certainty and consistency in rights. In
v
estment in
knowledge-based industries should be grounded in a predictable legal framework for the
protection of that knowledge. Finally, rights can only be coherent if they are simple enough to be
understood by the general public as well as by IP specialists. As discussed in Chapter 3, the
performance of the UK IP system is regarded as generally good. This section therefore focuses on
the role of IP in promoting international de
v
elopment; an aspect of policy de
v
elopment that has
perhaps been rather neglected. This section makes recommendations to ensure that the
international IP system is clear and comprehensible.
R o l e o f I n t e l l e c t u a l Pr o p e r t y f o r d e v e l o p m e n t
4.49
Policy makers and de
v
elopment economists agree on the need to foster inno
v
ation
and technology transfer to the de
v
eloping world. Differences exist o
v
er the best means of
achie
v
ing this goal. There is considerable disagreement o
v
er what sort of IP regime is in the
best interests of de
v
eloping countries.
4.50
Some commentators, for example Romer,
46
and Shapiro and Hassett
47
argue that
âstrongâ IP rights are in the interests of de
v
eloping countries. They contend that strong IP
protection creates the necessary incenti
v
es for firms, principally, if not exclusi
v
ely, from the
de
v
eloped world, to in
v
est in poorer countries, by enabling them to capture the
v
alue in ideas.
This, they argue, is of benefit to poorer countries because indigenous firms will capture spill-
o
v
er benefits from foreign firms. For example, their employees will learn non-IP protected
skills, such as good management. This approach could be broadly characterised as
emphasising the importance of market mechanisms (in the form of IP rights) as a means of
stimulating de
v
eloping countries to
inn
ovate
.
4.51
Howe
v
er, other commentators, most notably the Commission on Intellectual
Property Rights, commissioned by the Department for International De
v
elopment, contend
that âweakâ IP is in the best interests of de
v
eloping countries. Countries with weak IP regimes
are able to use technologies refined in de
v
eloped countries in order to de
v
elop their own
inno
v
ati
v
e capacity. This approach could be said to emphasise âextra-marketâ mechanisms
and place a strong emphasis on the need for de
v
eloping countries to
i
m
i
tate
. The economist
Keith Maksus explains: âenforceable IP rights are neither necessary nor sufficient to establish
robust inflows of technologyâ.
48
4.52
There is a wealth of e
v
idence showing a correlation between strong IP and high
growth rates. One study of 80 countries between
1
975 and
1
994 showed that strong IP was
correlated with high growth in rich and poor countries. Another study examining 95 countries
from
1
960 to
1
988 found strong correlations, and that foreign direct in
v
estment (FDI) was
encouraged in de
v
eloping countries with strong IP protection.
49
4.53
Howe
v
er, the e
v
idence from that study was not conclusi
v
e. It showed correlation
between strong IP and high growth, not causation. The rapid growth rates experienced in
South East Asia in the
1
960s and
1
970s were stimulated by
v
ery high le
v
els of sa
v
ing and
The case for
âstrongâ IP
58
The Gowers Review
46
Economic Growth, Romer P., in
Fortune Encyclopedia of Economics
, Henderson D., ed, 1993.
47
The Economic Value of IP,
Shapiro R. and Hassett K., 2005.
48
Encouraging International Technology Transfer
, Maksus, K., International Centre for Trade and Sustainable Development
and United Nations Conference on Trade and Development, 2004.
49
The Economic Value of IP
, Shapiro R. and Hassett K., 2005.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
in
v
estment. It might be the case that local in
v
estment and the desire to protect indigenous
inno
v
ations prompted stronger IP protection.
4.54
Also, the studies cited measure Gross Domestic Product, not Gross National Product,
in the de
v
eloping countries they in
v
estigate.
50
This means that the studies include benefits
that accrue to the shareholders of the foreign firms in addition to the benefits to nationals in
de
v
eloping countries. Although there are likely to be some multiplier effects, these results
probably o
v
erstate the benefits to de
v
eloping countries significantly.
4.55
The de
v
elopment of todayâs richer countries suggests that âweakerâ IP may be more
suited to countries in de
v
elopment. In its formati
v
e stages of de
v
elopment the USA sought to
de
v
elop by appropriating technology from Europe. George Washington suggested legislation
to encourage âthe introduction of new and useful in
v
entions from abroadâ. Between
1
790 and
1
836 the USA restricted patents to residents, hardly an approach to incenti
v
ise foreign capital
inflows and ensure free markets. When Switzerland industrialised in the
1
880s it did so
without a patent system, allowing it to benefit from inno
v
ations de
v
eloped elsewhere.
Ultimately patents were only introduced under pressure from trading partners. Similarly,
between
1
960 and
1
980 Asian economies emphasised the importance of re
v
erse engineering
and imitation. When South Korea adopted patents in
1
96
1
their term was limited to only
1
2
years and they were not a
v
ailable for foodstuffs, pharmaceuticals or chemicals. Perhaps most
strikingly, Italy only introduced a patent system in
1
978.
5
1
4.56
Patent rights are territorial. To gain protection, firms must register their rights in each
country in which they seek protection. Therefore, it is not ob
v
ious that there is a link between
the location of R&D and the patent regime in that country. For example, a company could
undertake R&D in a country with no IP protection and quite easily register the in
v
ention
somewhere else. Factors including the presence of skilled workers and low costs are more
likely to impact on R&D location decisions than the strength of the IP system. Simply
strengthening the IP system in de
v
eloping countries would not necessarily facilitate foreign
in
v
estment. Furthermore, there are costs associated with issuing and enforcing IP rights, both
for consumers who face higher prices for goods and for stretched go
v
ernment finances in
staffing IP offices with trained experts.
4.57
The economic e
v
idence and, in particular, the history of currently de
v
eloped
countries suggest that a single one-size-fits-all approach is inappropriate. Stronger IP
protection can ultimately reap rewards in terms of greater domestic inno
v
ation in de
v
eloping
countries and in de
v
eloping countries with sufficient capacity to inno
v
ate. Howe
v
er, it has
little impact on inno
v
ation in de
v
eloping countries without the capacity to inno
v
ate, and it
may impose additional costs.
52
Gi
v
en that different IP regimes are more appropriate at
different stages of de
v
elopment, it would make sense to allow indi
v
idual nations to choose
when to strengthen their IP regimes, rather than to seek to enforce a certain perspecti
v
e.
4.58
Chapter 3 outlined the international architecture for IP. The Trade-Related Aspects of
Intellectual Property Rights Agreement (TRIPS) sets out minimum standards for IP which all
World Trade Organisation (WTO) Member States must meet. These stipulations ha
v
e pro
v
en
v
ery burdensome for some de
v
eloping countries. For least de
v
eloped countries (LDCs),
which ha
v
e not yet de
v
eloped their own technology base, the best means of encouraging
technology transfer is to utilise the freedoms and flexibilities that exist in TRIPS.
The international
architecture
âOne size fits allâ
is inappropriate
The case for
âweakâ IP
59
The Gowers Review
50
The Role of Intellectual Property Rights in Economic Growth
, Gould D.M. and Gruben W.C.,
Journal of Development
Economics
, March 1996.
51
Integrating Intellectual Property Rights and Development Policy
, Commission on Intellectual Property Rights, 2002.
52
The Role of Intellectual Property Rights in Technology Transfer and Economic Growth: Theory and Evidence
, Falvey R. and
Foster N., United Nations Industrial Development Organization, 2006.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.59
In addition to exploiting the potential for weaker IP regimes, where appropriate it is
important that de
v
eloping countries can see, and are able to use, the benefits that IP
undoubtedly brings. For example, patent offices in de
v
eloping countries could encourage
rapid publication of patents and acti
v
ely assist local firms and indi
v
iduals to access patents
and use them to assist local inno
v
ation. In a similar
v
ein, there are opportunities to use IP
rights to create
v
alue using the resources of de
v
eloping countries, for example establishing
protection for geographic identifications for coffee-growing areas.
4.60
There are ways in which de
v
eloping countries could seek to increase the stock of
public knowledge that an IP system facilitates. One way of achie
v
ing this would be to ha
v
e
rising patent renewal fees. This would encourage international firms who hold patents to
allow them to lapse and fall into the public domain earlier, thus enabling other firms to use
and adapt them. It is true that this would reduce the
v
alue of exclusi
v
e rights for patent
holders, but for technology that has been patented in the de
v
eloping world firms are likely to
ha
v
e already recouped most of the R&D costs from markets in de
v
eloped countries in any
case. This was the approach taken by South Korea and Taiwan to enable local businesses to
mo
v
e gradually up the technological cur
v
e, first by imitating de
v
eloped technologies and
later de
v
eloping their own.
4.61
It is important that Go
v
ernments and patent offices in de
v
eloping countries are aware
of the potential benefits a
v
ailable to them within the current international IP framework.
Crucially, they should adapt their IP regimes in the manner most applicable to their
circumstances. They should also take ad
v
antage of helpful aspects of the IP system, such as the
requirement to pro
v
ide public information about inno
v
ations, to foster technology transfer.
4.62
But patent offices in de
v
eloping countries often lack resources and face large
workloads. This can hinder the de
v
elopment of a strategic, coordinated approach to IP
matters. The UK has forged strong relationships with foreign patent offices, for example in
China, to assist them with application procedures and enforcement policies. The UK Patent
Office (UKPO) also has good contacts with offices in de
v
eloping countries. Howe
v
er, there is
potential for further joint working.
4.63
In the short term the pro
v
ision of technical assistance to aid de
v
eloping countries to
take a more strategic approach to IP should help to facilitate the transfer of technologies. In
the longer term it would be helpful for the international community to enable the least
de
v
eloped countries to âstrengthenâ IP regimes as and when it suited them. Indeed, it has
already been recognised that the least de
v
eloped countries (in the WTO) may need longer to
implement some of requirements of TRIPS than the present deadline of 20
1
6.
60
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 5:
UKPO should undertake joint working with African patent offices
from mid-2007, with the aim of:
â˘
helping them to take advantage of the flexibilities currently existing in the
WTO/TRIPS architecture where appropriate; and
â˘
encouraging them to make positive use of IP rights through dissemination of
information in patents.
Recommendation 6:
Encourage the international community under the auspices of the
WTO to review the TRIPS status of the least developed countries prior to 2016 and
consider whether further extension for reaching TRIPS compliance would be appropriate.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.64
There are also concerns that TRIPS may be too restricti
v
e to meet the needs of
de
v
eloping countries in relation to access to pharmaceutical products. There ha
v
e been
particular problems with its pro
v
isions on compulsory licensing. A compulsory licence is an
in
v
oluntary contract between a patent holder and a third party authorised by the
Go
v
ernment. It entitles the licensee to make use of the patented material (in this case a drug)
for a period during the lifetime of the patent. Compulsory licensing thereby enables
Go
v
ernments in the de
v
eloping world to reduce the costs of pro
v
iding medicines by
introducing another pro
v
ider into the market.
4.65
Conditions in TRIPS can hinder the effecti
v
eness of compulsory licensing. TRIPS only
allows licensees to pro
v
ide drugs to their domestic market.
53
So, only a firm in a de
v
eloping
country could produce the drugs for sale in that country. But de
v
eloping countries often lack
sufficient manufacturing capacity to produce drugs. This renders compulsory licensing
pro
v
isions of limited use.
4.66
In 200
1
it was acknowledge in the Doha Declaration on TRIPS and Public Health that
de
v
eloping countries with âinsufficient or no manufacturing capacities in the pharmaceutical
sector could face difficulties in making effecti
v
e use of compulsory licensing under the TRIPS
Agreementâ.
54
In 2003, to address this problem, a Decision of the General Council enabled
de
v
eloping countries to import drugs made under compulsory licences abroad until 2007.
TRIPS has been amended to make this suspension permanent, but it needs to be ratified by
two-thirds of the WTO members to come into effect. The Re
v
iew urges the Go
v
ernment to
take whate
v
er steps it can to ensure that this amendment comes into effect before the
temporary suspension elapses in December 2007. It also belie
v
es that the Go
v
ernment should
look fa
v
ourably on any future proposals to amend TRIPS that may be necessary to address the
public health crisis in de
v
eloping countries.
F L E X I B I L I T Y
4.67
Globalisation and technical changes ha
v
e had significant impact on the IP system. It
is
v
ital that in both the rights and the âexceptionsâ to those rights, which limit the control of
the rights owner, the IP system is robust and able to cope with technological and
en
v
ironmental changes so it can continue to facilitate inno
v
ation and ensure public support.
F a i r d e a l i n g a n d e x c e p t i o n s t o c o p y r i g h t
4.68
Copyright arises automatically for written, recorded and other creati
v
e works. There
are exceptions for a number of uses that would be unlikely to occur in a pure free market. For
example, if a documentary maker films a scene in a building where a number of photographs
are permanently displayed, he would ha
v
e to seek permission from each of the copyright
owners (if there were no exception). The transaction costs of these permissions would be
prohibiti
v
e and would probably pre
v
ent the documentary from being made.
55
In addition, a
number of uses consistent with basic rights, for example copying a book into Braille, would
infringe copyright in the absence of an exception. These two arguments pro
v
ide the rationale
61
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 7:
Government should encourage WTO members to ratify the
amendments to TRIPS to make importation of drugs easier and cheaper.
53
Article 31(f).
54
Paragraph 6 of Doha Declaration.
55
Excuse and Justification in the Law of Fair Use: Transaction Costs Have Always Been Only Part of the Story, Gordon,
W.J.,
Journal of the Copyright Society of the USA,
149, 2003.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
for âfair dealingâ or âfair useâ exceptions. There is concern that, at present, the UK exceptions,
are too narrow and that this is stunting new creators from producing work and generating
new
v
alue.
4.69
The USA has a more flexible âfair useâ exception than the UK and outlines four tests
which the use of a work must meet in order not to infringe copyright.
56
This broader approach
to copyright exceptions has opened up a commercial space for others to create
v
alue. For
example, Googleâs ability to âcacheâ websites, effecti
v
ely copying content without ha
v
ing to
seek permission first, has been ruled as a fair use of other peopleâs copyrighted material. Judge
Robert C. Jones of District Ne
v
ada Court ruled: âThe automated, non-
v
olitional conduct by
Google in response to a userâs request does not constitute direct infringement under the
Copyright Actâ.
57
In the UK, such pro
v
isions were only introduced in 2002.
58
Google explain in
their response to the Call for E
v
idence: âThe existence of a general fair use exception that can
adapt to new technical en
v
ironments may explain why the search engines first de
v
eloped in
the USA, where users were able to rely on flexible copyright exceptions, and not in the UK,
where such uses would ha
v
e been considered infringementâ.
59
4.70
âFair usesâ of copyright can create economic
v
alue without damaging the interests of
copyright owners. As well as being more flexible, the exception can be interpreted more
broadly. The film
West S
i
de Story
, which grossed $43.7 million ($39.9 million when adjusted
for inflation), may be considered a reworking of
Romeo a
n
d Jul
i
et
, which is out of copyright.
This figure indicates that works which build on others can be extremely
v
aluable, and also are
not necessarily substitutes for the original work â indeed, it is not the case that
West S
i
de Story
has made
Romeo a
n
d Jul
i
et
less popular or less commercially successful.
4.71
Finally, it should be noted that not all creators are opposed to their work being used
to create economic
v
alue for someone else. Creati
v
e Commons licences use licensing to limit
copyright protection and facilitate others using the work.
60
Fifty million such licenses ha
v
e
been issued, two-thirds of which allow for deri
v
ati
v
e works, and a quarter of which allow their
work to be used for any purpose.
4.72
There is currently no pro
v
ision in UK law for pri
v
ate copying. In many European
states, such as Germany and France, as well as in the USA, a pri
v
ate copying exception exists.
The lack of a pri
v
ate copying exception in the UK makes it illegal, for example, to copy music
from a CD that one has purchased onto a computer or MP3 player that one has also
legitimately purchased. Much of the British public is unaware or unconcerned that their
actions are prohibited under the law. In June 2006 the BPI announced that âwe belie
v
e that we
now need to make a clear and public distinction between copying for your own use and
copying for dissemination to third parties and make it unequi
v
ocally clear to the consumer
that if they copy their CDs for their own pri
v
ate use in order to mo
v
e the music from format
to format we will not pursue them.â
6
1
Allowing private
copying will
improve clarity
Exceptions can
create value
62
The Gowers Review
56
Under section 107 of the USA Copyright Act.
57
Reported in http://www.theregister.co.uk/2006/01/27/google_cache_copyright_breach_ruling/
.
58
By the Electronic Communications (EC Directive) Regulations 2002 (SI 2002/2013).
59
Call for Evidence submission, Google.
60
Creative Commons is only a licence and relies on copyright; it is not a separate legal model.
61
Evidence from BPI to House of Commons Select Committee for Culture, Media and Sport Inquiry into New Media and
the Creative Industries.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.73
Format shifting music for personal use from CDs to another media is an entirely
legitimate acti
v
ity. It is essential to reflect this clearly in the law. Rapid technological change
has altered the way that media is recorded, stored and played. As such, pri
v
ate copying should
enable users to copy media on to different technologies for personal use.
4.74
Under the Information Society Directi
v
e, countries are able to enact a pri
v
ate copying
exception pro
v
ided that âfair compensationâ is gi
v
en to rights holders.
62
In France, Germany
and many other countries le
v
ies are exacted on hardware and blank media. One of the main
problems with le
v
ies is that they are blunt instruments: the amount is fixed and therefore does
not reflect the number of times a de
v
ice is used, nor can it compensate for each indi
v
idual
copy. It is also not clear that royalties are accurately remitted to rights holders as it is
v
ery
difficult to determine whose music is being copied. The European Commission is re
v
iewing
the entire body of copyright law, and is specifically in
v
estigating whether le
v
ies work.
4.75
The Re
v
iew belie
v
es it is possible to create a
v
ery limited pri
v
ate copying exception
without a copyright le
v
y.
63
If rightholders know in ad
v
ance of a sale of a particular work that
limited copying of that work can take place, the economic cost of the right to copy can be
included in the sale price. The âfair compensationâ required by the Directi
v
e can be included in
the normal sale price. This means, howe
v
er, that any pri
v
ate right to copy cannot be extended
retrospecti
v
ely as copies of works already sold would not include this âfair compensationâ.
Therefore, collecting societies may wish to consider making a single block licence a
v
ilable to
allow consumers to format shift their back catalogues ligitimately.
4.76
There should be some strict limits on the scope of any pri
v
ate copying exception. The
Re
v
iew recommends that the pri
v
ate copying should be limited to âformat shiftingâ (i.e.
transferring a work from CD to an MP3 player or from a
v
ideo tape to D
V
D) rather than simply
allowing any copies to be made for pri
v
ate purposes. The exception would only allow one
copy per âformatâ, but it would also ha
v
e to recognise that transfer between formats may
require intermediate steps (or formats) to be taken.
64
4.77
Many users in the Call for E
v
idence outlined problems in using material for genuine
academic purposes. Fair dealing for the purposes of non-commercial research and pri
v
ate
study, permitted by section 29 of the CDPA excludes copying sound recordings or film, which
is inconsistent and adds to the cost of negotiating rights for sound recordings and films.
Private copying
for research
should apply to
all media
63
The Gowers Review
62
Article 5(2)(a) and (b) of Directive 2001/29/EC.
63
Recital 35 of the Directive 2001/29/EC states âin cases where rightholders have already received payment in some other
form, for instance as part of a licence fee, no specific or separate payment may be due.... In certain situations where the
prejudice to the rightholder would be minimal,
no obligation for payment may ariseâ
[Reviewâs emphasis].
64
Further, as with other exceptions, where a work that is copied legitimately under the private copy exception is
subsequently dealt with (e.g. it is sold, let or hired or communicated to the public) it would become an infringing copy.
See, for example, section 70(2) and (3) of the CDPA.
Recommendation 8:
Introduce a limited private copying exception by 2008 for format
shifting for works published after the date that the law comes into effect. There should be
no accompanying levies for consumers.
Recommendation 9:
Allow private copying for research to cover all forms of content.
This relates to the copying, not the distribution, of media.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.78
There are copyright exceptions which enable libraries to copy material for readersâ
âpri
v
ate and non-commercial studyâ. It is up to indi
v
idual librarians to determine whether
the copy will be used for pri
v
ate and non-commercial study, which can be problematic. The
Libraries and Archi
v
es Copyright Alliance reports that âInfoSoc means that not-for-profits
and charities now do not fall under exception for copying for researchâ. The British Academy
argues that the exception ought to co
v
er all scholarly research, but that there may be an issue
with NGOs that ha
v
e a commercial wing. As such, it proposes that any use that does not
conflict with normal exploitation of a work, i.e. the sale of the work, should be exempted.
4.79
The British Library response to the Call for E
v
idence, highlighted that the UK has far
more stringent restrictions on copying for archi
v
ing and preser
v
ation than other countries. As
Table 4.2 shows, library permissions in the UK are out of step with other countries in three
areas: the number of copies allowed, the types of works that may be copied for preser
v
ation,
and format shifting.
Table 4.1: What libraries are allowed to do
Are there restrictions on the type
Are there restrictions in In the digital environment
of in-copyright work that can be
statute on the numbers
are there restrictions on
copied by libraries for heritage
of copies that can be
format shifting an
and archive purposes?
made by libraries?
original work for
preservation?
Denmark
None
None
1
None
France
Not covered in French law
Not covered in French law
Not covered in French law
Germany
None
None
2
â
Japan
None
None
1
None
Spain
3
None
None
None
UK
Sound, film and broadcast
One copy only
Permanent or semi-
excluded
permanent format
shifting not permitted in
copyright law
USA
None
Three copies only
None
1
Both respondents said that in reality this was limited by reasonableness.
2
A German High Court ruling has interpreted the legislation to mean no more than seven copies.
3
This reflects Spainâs new copyright law, which is currently being ratified in the Spanish Congress.
Source: British Library.
Libraries require
exceptions for
the digital age
64
The Gowers Review
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.80
In the digital world, opening a document on screen creates an additional copy of a
work.
65
Other countries take an approach guided by the principle of âreasonablenessâ which
seems a far more sensible and flexible approach than the current UK approach.
4.81
The CDPA pro
v
ides exceptions to copyright on literary, dramatic or musical work for
archi
v
ists in national libraries.
66
Howe
v
er, the exception does not include sound recordings,
tele
v
ision shows or films.
4.82
This is problematic for works on unstable media, such as celluloid films. Of American
feature films of the
1
920s, fewer than 20 per cent sur
v
i
v
e; and for the
1
9
1
0s the sur
v
i
v
al rate
falls to half of that. This presents a problem for the British Library. It is cheaper to digitise films
when they are still in a good condition than to wait until they are out of copyright to digitise
and restore them. As the copyright term is long, many films and sound recordings will ha
v
e
degenerated completely before they can be copied freely. It costs $40,000 to preser
v
e a single
colour film by copying it back on to film, compared with $200 per hour of footage to digitise
film.
67
The prohibitions on format shifting exacerbate this problem.
4.83
The inability of the British Library and the other depositary libraries and archi
v
es to
make archi
v
e copies of sound recordings e
v
en for preser
v
ation raises real concerns for the
protection of cultural heritage. Nelson Mandelaâs
R
i
vo
ni
a
trial speech was recorded in
1
964
on dictabelt. This format has fallen out use and the hardware is no longer a
v
ailable. The
British Library is unable to copy this for preser
v
ation without clearing the rights, and there is
a risk that the medium will deteriorate before copyright expires. As already extensi
v
ely
detailed, the rights clearance process for old material is extremely burdensome. Many sound
recordings held in the Sound Archi
v
e are orphan works and therefore the Library is not able
to copy the work legally. The costs to preser
v
e sound increase as technology mo
v
es on, as
shown in Chart 4.6. Therefore waiting until recordings are out of copyright will result in the
loss of many recordings and will substantially increase the costs of preser
v
ation.
Sound and film
cannot be
preserved by
libraries
65
The Gowers Review
65
See section 17(6) of the CDPA.
66
Section 42 states: âThe librarian or archivist of a prescribed library or archive may, if the prescribed conditions [i.e. for
preservation] are complied with, make a copy from any item in the permanent collection of the library or archive
... without infringing the copyright in any literary, dramatic or musical work, in any illustrations accompanying such a work
or, in the case of a published edition, in the typographical arrangement.â
67
Brief of amici curiae the internet archive,
Eldred
v.
Ashcroft
; based on http://www.loc.gov/film/plan.html, and Experience
of Internet Archive, interview with Brewster Kahle.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.84
Gi
v
en the costs of copying on the same medium, and the ad
v
ances in technology
which allow works to be
v
iewed in a number of ways, the limitation on format shifting seems
to constrict the potential that libraries ha
v
e to preser
v
e and share cultural goods. As also
mentioned abo
v
e, this is a particular issue for film and sound recordings. Format shifting
pro
v
isions ought to apply to all items held within the library for the purposes of preser
v
ation.
4.85
In the USA, the fair use exception allows âtransformati
v
e worksâ. The purpose of this
exception is to enable creators to rework material for a new purpose or with a new meaning.
Such new works can create new
v
alue, and can e
v
en create new markets.
Enabling
transformative
use will spur
innovation
Prohibitions on
format shifting
limit the ability
to archive
66
The Gowers Review
Box 4.5: Cost to digitise sound recordings for preservation
It is important to note in regard to sound, as well as other digital media, that the potential
obsolescence of carrier formats and playback hardware, plus the increased need to reverse
engineer formats, all generate higher costs.
a
a
Call for Evidence submission, British Library.
Source: British Library.
Chart 4.6: Cost to digitise sound recordings for preservation
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Cost per hour: pounds
CD
VHS
Betamax
Cassette
Tape
Acetate
discs
Open Reel
Tape
Vinyl LPs
78 RPM
Audio Carrier
490
211
65
69
49
47
41
19
Recommendation 10a:
Amend section 42 of CDPA by 2008 to permit libraries to copy
the master copy of all classes of work in permanent collection for archival purposes and to
allow further copies to be made from the archived copy to mitigate against subsequent
wear and tear.
68
Recommendation 10b:
Enable libraries to format shift archival copies by 2008 to ensure
records do not become obsolete.
69
68
The Review believes that amending section 42 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 to allow replacement
copies of sound recordings and films is appropriate and permitted by Article 5(2)(c) of Directive 2001/29/EC, of the
Information Society Directive.
69
This would be permitted by Article 5(2)(c) of Directive 2001/29/EC, the Information Society Directive.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.86
Transforming works can create huge
v
alue and spur on inno
v
ation. âGood artists
borrow; great artists steal.â So said Pablo Picasso, borrowing from Igor Stra
v
insky, or perhaps
from T. S. Eliot.
70
Hip hop is not the first genre to âsampleâ music: composers from Beetho
v
en
to Mozart to Bartok to Charles I
v
es ha
v
e regularly recycled themes, motifs, and segments of
prior works.
7
1
Under the current copyright regime, these creators would need to clear
permission and negotiate licences to a
v
oid infringement suits.
72
The barriers that new
musicians ha
v
e to o
v
ercome are extremely high, and the homogenisation of hip hop music is,
critics argue, a direct response to the costs of clearing rights.
67
The Gowers Review
Box 4.6: The rise and fall of creativity in Hip Hop has, in part, been
attributed to limited application of transformative use exception
Such an exception in US law enabled the Hip Hop industry to develop in the late 1970s and
early 1980s, allowing producers to sample older works to create a new genre of music and
to develop an entirely new market. In 1991, a decision against rapper Biz Markieâs
appropriation of a Gilbert and Sullivan song in the case
Grand Upright v. Warner
a
changed
practices dramatically. In
Bridgeport Music Inc. v. Dimension Films,
it was ruled that samples
which rise âto a level of legally cognizable appropriationâ
b
have to be licensed, but that
de
minimis
sampling was still to be considered fair use. This was reversed in the appeal to this
case, where the court ruled the three-note sample was not fair use and that musicians
should âget a license or do not sampleâ.
Musicians now have to clear rights with the owner of the sound recording and the
publisher and negotiate a license fee before using a sample. Chuck D argues that the
narrowing of the transformative use exception means that the âwhole collage element is
out the windowâ. When asked about how the change in the IP framework had affected
their work, The Beastie Boys commented that âwe canât just go crazy and sample
everything and anything like we did on Paulâs Boutique. Itâs limiting in the sense that if
weâre going to grab a two-bar section of something now, weâre going to have to think
about how much we really need itâ.
c
Importantly for music, clearance is required for the
performance and for the composition, although in the USA legal precedent suggests that
obtaining clearance for the sound recording is sufficient.
d
In the UK, however, this does not
appear to be the case. A notable example of this was The Verveâs single âBitter Sweet
Symphonyâ, which used an unlicensed sample from an orchestral version of The Rolling
Stonesâ song âThe Last Timeâ. The sample was derived from the song (not the
performance) and was deemed to infringe copyright. As such, The Verve were ordered to
pay 100 per cent royalties to Mick Jagger and Keith Richards.
a
780 F. Supp. 182 (S.D.N.Y. 1991).
b
Bridgeport Music Inc. v. Dimension Films
, 230 F. Supp.2d 830, 841 (M.D. Tenn. 2002).
c
http://www.wired.com/wired/archive/12.11/beastie.html
d
see
Newton v. Diamond and Others
(2003)349 Fd.3 591 (9th Cir. 2003).
70
âA good composer does not imitate; he stealsâ, Stravinsky 1.; âImmature poets imitate; mature poets stealâ, Eliot T.S.
71
From J.C. Bach to Hip Hop: Musical Borrowing, Copyright and Cultural Context
, Arewa O., 84
N.C.L. Rev
. 547, 630, 2006.
72
Copyrightâs Paradox: Property in Expression/Freedom of Expression
, Netanel N., forthcoming.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.87
The crucial point should be whether transformati
v
e use compromises the
commercial interests of the original creator or offends the artistic integrity of the original
creator. Judge Posnerâs decision in the âBeanie Babyâ case argued that in determining whether
use can be considered âfair useâ, the courts ought to consider the impact of the new work on
the sales of the older work. There are now certain things that should be considered when
assessing âfair useâ:
â˘
commercial interests: When the US Supreme Court ruled on
Campbell v.
Acuff- Rose Mus
i
c, I
n
c.,
73
concerning 2Li
v
e Crewâs âPretty Womanâ parody of
the Roy Orbison song, the court argued that the new work did not impact on
the commercial success or
v
iability of the original work; and
â˘
artistic integrity: The moral rights of the creator are inalienable, as such any
work which builds on pre
v
ious creation is subject to the moral rights of the
original creator. Enabling transformati
v
e use would not negate existing moral
rights, the right to be identified and the right to object to derogatory
treatment. Creators would still be able to use defamation laws to pre
v
ent
works that are offensi
v
e or damaging to the original creator from being made
a
v
ailable.
4.88
At present it would not be possible to create a copyright exception for transformati
v
e
use (but see the discussion of parody below) as it is not one of the exceptions set out as
permitted in the Information Society Directi
v
e.
74
Howe
v
er, the Re
v
iew recommends that the
Go
v
ernment seeks to amend the Directi
v
e to permit an exception along such lines to be
adopted in the UK.
4.89
There is currently no exception in copyright to parody works. The BBC commented in
its submission to the Call for E
v
idence that an exception to co
v
er parody in the UK would:
âfacilitate the broadcast and sale of programmes containing material included
under, for example, fair dealing.â
4.90
As well as reducing transaction costs across Europe, an exception to enable parody
can create
v
alue. Weird Al Yanko
v
ic has recei
v
ed 25 gold and platinum albums, four gold-
certified home
v
ideos and two GRAMMYsÂŽ by parodying other songs, but he had to ask
permission from rights holders. Furthermore, many works which are considered to ha
v
e high
v
alue could be considered parodies, for example Tom Stoppardâs
Rose
n
cra
n
tz a
n
d
Gu
i
lde
n
ster
n
Are
D
ead
. The Information Society Directi
v
e specifically allows for âcaricature,
parody or pasticheâ,
76
and the Re
v
iew recommends such an exception should be introduced
into UK law.
68
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 11:
Propose that Directive 2001/29/EC be amended to allow for an
exception for creative, transformative or derivative works, within the parameters of the
Berne Three-Step Test.
75
Recommendation 12:
Create an exception to copyright for the purpose of caricature,
parody or pastiche by 2008.
73
114 S.Ct. 1164 (1994).
74
Article 5 of Directive 2001/29/EC.
75
The Berne Three-Step Test outlines the maximum extent of exceptions to copyright. Under Article 13 of TRIPS,
signatories such as the UK agree to âconfine limitations or exceptions to exclusive rights to certain special cases which do
not conflict with the normal exploitation of the work and do not unreasonably prejudice the legitimate interests of the
rights holderâ.
76
Article 5(3)(k) of Directive 2001/29/EC.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
O r p h a n w o r k s
4.91
The term âorphan workâ is used to describe a situation where the owner of a copyright
work cannot be identified by someone else who wishes to use the work. Whene
v
er someone
wants to copy or use a work it is necessary to go through a number of steps. First, they must
determine whether something is âinâ copyright. This is made difficult by the range of different
terms and the fact that in many cases term is dependent on the death of the author. It is often
extremely difficult to trace authors. When works stop being commercially a
v
ailable it
becomes e
v
en more difficult to track down biographical information. Estimates suggest that
only 2 per cent of all works that are protected by copyright are commercially a
v
ailable. In
1
930,
1
0,027 books were published in the USA, but by 200
1
all but
1
74 were out of print.
77
The
British Library estimates 40 per cent of all print works are orphan works.
4.92
E
v
en if users are able to find some information about the author, publisher or
distributor this may not be sufficient to identify the rights holder. The author may ha
v
e
assigned copyright to a third party. Furthermore, copyright held by businesses can be lost
through âabandonwareâ: when businesses go bankrupt or merge copyright ownership,
information can be lost. The problem is made still more difficult in the UK, where there is no
copyright registration system detailing ownership.
4.93
This is a large problem for many users, including those who wish to make copies for
archi
v
ing or preser
v
ation and need to seek permission. The Chair of the Museum Copyright
Group, Peter Wienard, belie
v
es that from the total collection of photographs of 70 institutions
(around
1
9 million), the percentage of photographs where the author is known (other than for
fine art photographs) is
1
0 per cent. In a British Library study to get permission to digitise 200
sound recordings, researchers were unable to identify the rights holders for almost half the
recordings.
78
69
The Gowers Review
77
The Economic Structure of Intellectual Property Law
, Posner R. and Landes W., 2003. Source: American Library Annual and
Book Trade Almanac for 1872â1957.
78
Call for Evidence submission, British Library.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.94
One of the key problems with orphan works is that permission is needed in order to
make any copy of certain work. As discussed earlier, permission is required for the purposes
of restoring sound recordings and films that are degenerating for preser
v
ation. This is
especially an issue for films, many of which are on unstable formats.
4.95
Many works that lie unused could create
v
alue. For example, the film
Itâs a Wo
n
derful
L
i
fe
79
lost money in its first run and was ignored by its original copyright owners. When the
owners failed to renew their copyright in
1
970, it was broadcast on the Public Broadcasting
Ser
v
ice channel in the USA. It is now a family classic, and worth millions in prime time
ad
v
ertising re
v
enue. The book
The Secret Garde
n
, since copyright has expired, has been made
into a mo
v
ie, a musical, a cookbook, a CD-ROM
v
ersion, and two sequels. For works still in
copyright, if users are unable to locate and seek permission from owners, this
v
alue cannot be
generated. For example, documentary makers often find it impossible to track down the
rights owners of old pieces of film, many of which ha
v
e multiple owners, all of whom are
untraceable, and are not able to use older works to create new
v
alue.
Orphan works
can create value
70
The Gowers Review
Box 4.7: Experiences of clearing rights for orphan works
The US experience
â˘
A report by the Carnegie Mellon University Libraries details a systematic study of
the feasibility of obtaining permission to digitise and provide web-based access for
its collection, during which it discovered that for 22 per cent of the books in the
study, the publishers could not be found.
â˘
At a rough estimate, the exercise cost $200 per title for which permission was
granted.
â˘
Cornell University librarians estimated that obtaining permission to create a
digital archive of 343 monographs cost the library $50,000, and still it was not able
to identify the owners of 58 per cent of the monographs.
The British Library experience
â˘
The British Library is currently undergoing a protracted process of clearing over
4,000 hours of sound recordings as part of a British Library sound portal funded by
the Joint Information Systems Committee.
â˘
In the late 1980s, the Library made 220 oral history recordings of jazz musicians
and promoters. The majority of the recordings were made by the British Library
at the time, and as many permissions as possible were applied for and received by
the Library from the interviewees, as well as some of the interviewers/sound
recordists who were not Library employees.
â˘
Between May 2005 and February 2006, 200 identifiable outstanding permissions,
were applied for. Of these, only half had permissions granted and a quarter were
orphan works.
79
Dir. Capra F., 1946.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.96
The US Copyright Office published a report on orphan works in January 2006
80
which
examined the extent of the problem and outlined potential solutions. The system that they
preferred is one of limited liability. This means that users of orphan works are still infringing
copyright. Howe
v
er, if they ha
v
e conducted a âreasonable searchâ they cannot be sued for
infringement if the owner subsequently emerges. The copyright owner will be eligible to
recei
v
e remuneration from the user of the orphan work. The fee would represent a proportion
of the
v
alue generated by any commercial uses of the work. The user would then ha
v
e to
negotiate a fee for any continued use of the work. For non-commercial uses of the work, the
owner will be able to request that the work is no longer used and, if the user complies, no
remuneration is necessary, but they will also be able to negotiate the terms for continued
use.
4.97
Across the spectrum of the creati
v
e industries, there is recognition that sol
v
ing the
problem of orphan works is good for e
v
eryone. A solution is good for all those who are
in
v
ol
v
ed in archi
v
ing and cataloguing; for all those creators who use older works to create
new
v
alue; for those whose work is restored and who may benefit from remuneration from a
new source; and for consumers.
4.98
In a paper for the Gowers Re
v
iew, the British Screen Ad
v
isory Committee outlined a
proposal for an exception to copyright to permit the use of a genuine orphan works, with a
number of pro
v
isions detailing the scope of the exception. This would operate
v
ery similarly
to the US âlight touchâ approach.
8
1
4.99
Currently, such an exception would be incompatible the UKâs obligations under the
Information Society Directi
v
e.
82
There are currently discussions at the European le
v
el to
introduce pro
v
isions to enable Member States to create a solution to the orphan works
problem. The UK Go
v
ernment should work with Member States to amend the Directi
v
e to
allow such an exception. Any such exception should permit the use of genuine orphan works,
pro
v
ided the user has performed a reasonable search and, where possible, gi
v
es attribution.
4.100
One of the key components of any solution to the orphan works problem will be
de
v
eloping the parameters of a âreasonable searchâ. The British Library recommended that the
requirement be âbest endea
v
oursâ, but users may still need a guide as to what constitutes a
thorough search to protect them from liability. As such, we recommend that the Patent Office
works with groups of rights holders, collecting societies, libraries and archi
v
es to establish
clear guidelines for âreasonable searchesâ.
Guidelines will
reduce
uncertainty and
costs
A number of
solutions have
been proposed to
solve this
problem
71
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 13:
Propose a provision for orphan works to the European
Commission, amending Directive 2001/29/EC.
80
Available at: http://www.copyright.gov/orphan/orphan-report-full.pdf.
81
Copyright and Orphan Works,
British Screen Advisory Council, 2006.
82
Directive 2001/29/EC. Article 5 of this Directive sets out the permissible exceptions to copyright and none of these
seem to envisage a
commercial
orphan works exception.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.101
The loci for âreasonable searchesâ will
v
ary by medium. For example, someone
wishing to track down the rights holder of a piece of music must consult Catco, the UK record
industryâs sound recordings database, and follow up on any biographical information held
there. For a work of literature, one must search at the British Library, and for film at the
National Film and Tele
v
ision Archi
v
e. Gi
v
en that many searches require knowledge of the date
of death of the artist and the subsequent owners, this would ha
v
e to be reflected in the search
parameters. A registration system of copyright would greatly facilitate such a search.
Howe
v
er, compulsory registration is contrary to international treaty obligations.
83
It would be
desirable for the UK Patent Office to host a
v
oluntary register, where rights owners could
deposit information as to their location and their named estate, or to pro
v
ide a portal ser
v
ice
for users to access existing pri
v
ate registration scheme.
84
D i g i t a l R i g h t s M a n a g e m e n t
4.102
Digital rights management tools (DRMs) are sequences of digital code that restrict
certain uses of copyrighted material. For example, they pre
v
ent consumers from transferring
films stored on D
V
D to a computer hard dri
v
e. DRMs ha
v
e two functions:
â˘
accountant; currently it is difficult to track what music is played where, and
therefore it is difficult for collecting societies to remunerate artists. DRM
âwatermarksâ can track usage electronically to report information back to
collecting societies to ensure distribution of royalties is fair; and
â˘
policeman; DRM can limit the access to content, for example, to pre
v
ent
copying.
4.103
In June 2006, the All Party Internet Group (APIG) published a report on DRM. It stated
that DRM will ne
v
er be entirely effecti
v
e, but can remo
v
e temptation for the âcasual copierâ.
APIG notes that âbecause DRMs can almost in
v
ariably be circum
v
ented, a legal framework is
needed to pre
v
ent unauthorised copying at a commercial scale, and in the UK this is pro
v
ided
by the CDPAâ.
72
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 14a:
The Patent Office should issue clear guidance on the
parameters of a âreasonable searchâ for orphan works, in consultation with rights holders,
collecting societies, rights owners and archives, when an orphan works exception comes
into being.
Recommendation 14b:
The Patent Office should establish a voluntary register of
copyright, either on its own or through partnerships with database holders, by 2008.
83
Article 5(2) of the Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works.
84
There are voluntary registers available, for example the UK Copyright Service. However, to ask users to check all the
voluntary registers would increase transaction costs substantially.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.104
DRMs can pre
v
ent acti
v
ities permitted under the exceptions. For example, the Royal
National Institute for the Blind (RNIB) note that Adobe eBooks usually ha
v
e âaccessibilityâ
settings disabled. This pre
v
ents the
v
isually impaired exercising their rights to make copies in
accordance with the exceptions introduced by the Copyright (
V
isually Impaired Persons) Act
2002.
85
Such exceptions ought to be respected by technology.
4.105
The Information Society Directi
v
e recognises that DRMs may be used to pre
v
ent
legitimate copying and Article 6(4) requires Member States to ensure that technical measures
do not preclude a person from benefiting from certain copyright exceptions. This obligation
has been implemented in UK law.
86
If a person cannot exercise a permitted right due to a
DRM, they must issue a ânotice of complaintâ to the Secretary of State, who can then issue
directions on how to ensure that the permitted act can be performed. As yet, no-one has filed
a complete notice of complaint, yet both the Consumer Project on Technology (CPT), an IP
research body, and the RNIB told the APIG committee that this process is âslow and
cumbersomeâ.
4.106
The Re
v
iew recommends that the procedures in place for circum
v
enting DRM to
allow copying for uses deemed legitimate under copyright exceptions ought to be made
easier, for example through a model email form a
v
ailable on the Patent Office website.
Improve notice of
complaint
procedures
DRM trumps
copyright law
73
The Gowers Review
Box 4.8: Issues with DRM technology
1. Technical protections can enable restrictions that go beyond protecting content to
price discrimination in different EU markets:
â˘
for example Apple iTunes charges 79p in the UK and 68p in the EU for a single
music track, without the possibility of arbitrage.
2. DRMs can prevent uses permitted under fair dealing exceptions, and DRM tools do not
necessarily expire when copyright expires:
â˘
the Adobe eBook reader gives authors the ability to prevent readers from
electronically copying an insubstantial part of text â despite such copying not being
a copyright infringement; and
â˘
the British Libraryâs submission to the Call for Evidence noted that the great
majority of agreements relating to electronic licences undermined exceptions
provided for in UK and international copyright law.
3. DRMs can damage usersâ computers and can put limits on what users can and canât do
with the products:
â˘
some DRMs load up proprietary software or devices which may harm usersâ
computers or necessitate upgrades. In 2005 one record company was threatened
with legal action over anti-piracy protection on CDs that automatically installed
ârootkitâ software that could damage hard drives and violated usersâ privacy; and
â˘
some CDs will only play on two devices before locking.
Recommendation 15:
Make it easier for users to file notice of complaints procedures
relating to Digital Rights Management tools by providing an accessible web interface on
the Patent Office website by 2008.
85
Section 31A of the CDPA.
86
See section 296ZE of the CDPA.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.107
DRMs can be legitimately employed, and where they are they should be robust. The
Re
v
iew belie
v
es there is a need for clearer guidance on DRM for users, and encourages the
DTI to work with industry looking into labelling media. In the e
v
ent that companies use
DRMs to create market power, damage usersâ software or in
v
ade their pri
v
acy, the Re
v
iew
recommends that the Office of Fair Trading undertakes in
v
estigations. The Re
v
iew also
supports the DTI in
v
estigation into the EU single market, but notes that the key example of
DRM being used to segregate markets, namely differential pricing on iTunes, may be a result
of negotiations with collecting societies in
v
arying countries and not simply an issue arising
from the use of technical protection measures.
4.108
The Re
v
iew will make further recommendations on the way policy is formulated in
the Chapter 6 and notes that any future policy formulated on DRM ought to be consulted on
widely, with the
v
iews of all stakeholders, including consumers, libraries and creators, taken
into consideration.
C l a r i f y t h e U K p o s i t i o n o n n e w r i g h t s
4.109
There are concerns that a âone size fits allâ patent system may not pro
v
ide the right
incenti
v
es to inno
v
ate in new areas of technology, such as software and genetics. Many fast-
paced industries create new products at high speed, so the time it takes to get patent
protection is too long and the life span of the in
v
ention is too short for the costs to be
recouped in the monopoly period. The boundaries between patentable and unpatenetable
business methods and computer programmes are
v
ery unclear.
4.110
Additional layers of rights increase the problems with boundary conditions. At
present, new bands are ad
v
ised to trade mark their name, thus retaining perpetual rights o
v
er
their name e
v
en when their recordings or compositions ha
v
e passed into the public domain.
Databases can still be protected by copyright as well as database rights. Where different IP
rights o
v
erlap, exceptions that apply to one IP right may be barred by restrictions relating to
another. Introducing additional layers of protection is likely to encourage firms to game the
system in order to get as much protection for their products as possible. Creating more rights
could unnecessarily strengthen protection for products that are already protected adequately
by other forms of IP.
4.111
Additional layers of rights also ha
v
e high costs. First, there will be significant costs in
de
v
ising specialised systems to record and award the new rights; and new training and
recruitment costs to administer and ad
v
ise on the new right. Second, there could be high
costs in challenging the new rights. It is
v
ital that sui generis rights are properly targeted. It is
difficult for go
v
ernment to try to predict the technologies of the future and second guess the
in
v
estment requirements for such new technology. Four main issues were raised in the Call
for E
v
idence: utility model patents; software patents; biotechnology and genetic patents; and
business method patents.
4.112
The requirements for patentability are high, and the costs of protection are high. As
such, some users of the IP system ha
v
e called for the UK to introduce a âutility patentâ. This
would be a second tier of patent protection for in
v
entions which can be obtained quickly and
at a lower cost, but which will ha
v
e a shorter duration. In 2004, the European Commission
Enterprise Policy Indicators showed that the countries with inno
v
ation as an area of strength
Additional rights
increase
transaction costs
There have been
calls for new
rights
74
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 16:
DTI should investigate the possibility of providing consumer
guidance on DRM systems through a labelling convention without imposing unnecessary
regulatory burdens.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
were Finland, Denmark, Sweden and Germany. Sweden has no second-tier system, while
utility model systems in Finland and Denmark are relati
v
ely new, ha
v
ing been introduced in
1
99
1
and
1
992 respecti
v
ely. Other countries that do ha
v
e utility model patents, such as Italy
and Spain, were defined as ha
v
ing weak inno
v
ation systems. There seems to be no correlation
between the existence of a utility model patent and inno
v
ation. Rather, strong inno
v
ation
seems to be caused by a high pre
v
alence of inno
v
ati
v
e sectors, for example Finland and
Germany ha
v
e large electronic and transport industries respecti
v
ely.
4.113
While a utility model may reduce costs for some, there is a concern that it will
increase the costs for other users and stunt future inno
v
ation. More patent protection can
limit the ability of future in
v
entors to create new products. Introducing a new layer of
protection will increase boundary problems, and a new right could lead to an increase in
litigation. The Re
v
iew has therefore decided not to recommend the introduction of utility
model patents. It makes a number of other recommendations in Chapter 5 to reduce the costs
of acquiring patent protection.
4.114
There ha
v
e been calls in the UK to introduce pure computer software patents to
ensure that inno
v
ation is properly protected and encouraged. In Europe, patents are not
granted for computer programs as such,
87
but patents ha
v
e been granted to computer-based
inno
v
ations pro
v
ided they ha
v
e a technical effect. In the USA, pure computer software
patents can be granted. The e
v
idence on the success of pure computer software patents is
mixed. The software industry in the USA grew exponentially without pure software patents,
suggesting they are not necessary to promote inno
v
ation.
88
The e
v
idence suggests software
patents are used strategically; that is, to pre
v
ent competitors from de
v
eloping in a similar
field, rather than to incenti
v
ise inno
v
ation.
4.115
In addition to the concerns that increased protection does not increase incenti
v
es,
some ha
v
e commented that pure software patents do not meet the criteria for patentability.
The most profound problem with using patent law to protect software is that inno
v
ation in
the field is usually accomplished in increments too small to be
v
iewed as in
v
enti
v
e steps.
89
Se
v
eral submissions to the Call for E
v
idence, for example the Professional Contractors
Groupâs submission, argued that software should not be patentable in principle. Where
freelance businesses de
v
elop software, they rely on copyright to protect it. This protection is
free and automatic. The copying of as little as
1
.7 per cent of a programâs code has in the past
been found to be infringement of copyright.
90
4.116
Introducing pure software patents could raise the costs for small software de
v
elopers
to mitigate against risks surrounding R&D, thereby inflating the capital needs of software
de
v
elopment. Sun Microsystems argued that without exceptions that allowed for re
v
erse
engineering for interoperability, pure software patents could stifle competition.
4.117
Last year, the European Parliament rejected the Computer Implemented In
v
entions
Directi
v
e, but this issue has been raised again. The economic e
v
idence suggests that such
patents ha
v
e done little to raise incenti
v
es to inno
v
ate, and other e
v
idence suggests that the
introduction of such patents will ha
v
e a chilling effect on inno
v
ation. In the absence of such
e
v
idence, a new right for pure software patents should not be introduced, and so the scope of
patentability should not be extended to co
v
er computer programs as such.
There is little
evidence that
software patents
increase
incentives
75
The Gowers Review
87
Section 1(2)(c) of the Patents Act 1977 and Article 52(2)(c) and (3) of the European Patent Convention.
88
Benson Revisited: the Case Against Patent Protection for Algorithms and Other Computer Program-Related Inventions,
Samuelson P., 1990. The Patent Paradox Revisited: An Empirical Study of Patenting in the US Semi-conductor Industry
,
Hall B. and Ziedonis R.,
RAND Journal of Economics
, 2001, Protecting Their Intellectual Assets: Appropriability Conditions
and Why US Manufacturing Firms Patent (or Not), Cohen W., Nelson R. and Walsh J.,
Management Science
, 2002.
88
A Manifesto Concerning the Legal Protection of Computer Programs,
Samuelson P. et al., 94 Columbia Law Review. 2308,
2344-46.
90
Call for Evidence submission, Professional Contractors Group.
I
N S T R U M E N T S
4
4.118
The Re
v
iew is concerned that business method patents fail to meet the criteria for
patentability; namely that in
v
entions are non-ob
v
ious and no
v
el. In Europe, business
methods are not patentable as such, while in the USA business models are patentable.
9
1
4.119
There is some e
v
idence from the USA that patents on business methods are not
necessary for incenti
v
ising inno
v
ation, and that the costs to de
v
elop business methods are
low and therefore the products ought not to qualify for a full term of patent protection. There
are additional practical concerns with increasing business method patents. In a 200
1
consultation, the Patent Office reported that SMEs were particularly concerned about
business method patents potentially increasing the regulatory burden.
4.120
Concern was raised in some responses to the Call for E
v
idence regarding the
patentability of genetic material. It is worth noting that the European Patent Con
v
ention and
Patents Act
1
977 explicitly excludes disco
v
eries from patentable subject matter.
4.121
The proliferation of patents in this field has an anti-commons effect in the USA,
where multiple owners each ha
v
e a right to exclude others from a scarce resource and no-one
has effecti
v
e pri
v
ilege.
92
For example, the genetic research company Myriad has a patent on
the breast-cancer-causing BRCAI gene. This enabled the company to claim rights o
v
er all
diagnostic screening tools. The owners of this patent exercised their exclusi
v
e rights by
bringing infringement suits against organisations such as the Marie Curie Institute in Paris,
which was conducting tests on breast cancer tissues, ordering that samples should be sent to
the companyâs labs in Salt Lake City. The EPO struck this patent down.
4.122
The Re
v
iew supports the current position on pure software patents, business method
patents and gene patents, and recommends that changes to the current position should only
be made in light of economic e
v
idence that such changes would enhance inno
v
ation to offset
the considerable costs.
C O N C LU S I O N
4.123
This chapter has made a number of recommendations to ensure that the instruments
of IP are balanced, coherent and flexible. Chapter 5 will analyse the operations of these
instruments in the UK and make recommendations to ensure that the award, transaction and
enforcement of IP is transparent, comprehensible and affordable.
Gene patents
may stunt
downstream
innovation
The USA is out of
step with Europe
on business
method patents
76
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 17:
Maintain policy of not extending patent rights beyond their
present limits within the areas of software, business methods and genes.
91
Evidence from the Oxford Intellectual Property Research Centre and Olswang suggests that patents âmay be obtained
by claiming and new inventive, technical method of implementing a business methodâ. [The First Mover Monopoly,
OIPRC].
92
Can Patents Deter innovation? The Anticommons in Biomedical Research, Heller M. and Eisenberg R.,
Science,
vol. 28, 1
May 1998.
5
O
P E R AT I O N S
The Gowers Review
5.1
This chapter is concerned with the way in which the instruments of the Intellectual
Property (IP) system operate. It is split into three sections, detailing how IP is awarded, used
and enforced. As identified in Chapter 3 the ideal IP system should display the following
characteristics:
â˘
award
of IP rights should be affordable, comprehensible, swift, predictable
and transparent, with only high-quality rights granted;
â˘
use
of IP should allow ease of buying, selling, licensing, securitising and
obser
v
ing IP rights; and
â˘
enforcement
of IP should be swift, affordable and judicious.
5.2
The structure and operations of UK IP courts and of national and regional patent
offices including the UK Patent Office, European Patent Office (EPO), Office for
Harmonisation in the Internal Market (OHIM) and World Intellectual Property Organization
(WIPO) ha
v
e been discussed in chapter
1
. This chapter re
v
iews how the three strands of
operations currently function, and identifies problems and makes recommendations on how
to address them.
AWA R D
5.3
The way in which IP rights are awarded must be affordable, transparent, swift,
consistent and accessible to all users.
Wo r k s h a r i n g
5.4
It is often necessary, especially in todayâs global economy, for in
v
entors to seek patent
protection in a range of countries where there is an existing or prospecti
v
e market for the
product or process. Howe
v
er, there is no âinternational patentâ that grants protection
throughout the world and therefore patents must be obtained in each country where
protection is sought. To facilitate and simplify the procedures, attempts ha
v
e been made to
harmonise national patent laws.
5.5
The Patents Cooperation Treaty (PCT) instituted a procedure where a single
application is made which leads to a bundle of national patents. The PCT has two phases. The
first phase, the âinternational phaseâ, is conducted centrally; the second phase, the ânationalâ
(or âregionalâ) phase, is conducted by national patent offices (or regional patent offices such
as the EPO).
5.6
During the ânationalâ or âregionalâ phases, all patent applications are searched,
examined and, if thought to be patentable, granted by each national office where patent
protection is required. The initial phase of the PCT application results in an âinternational
search reportâ and a preliminary examination report on patentability, but most countries do
not rely on these and conduct their own search and examination procedures. Accordingly,
there is a substantial duplication of effort. In 2005, nearly
1
,000 patent applications were filed
directly in the UK from Japan and nearly 4,000 were filed from the USA. The processing of
these applications may be further ahead in the country of first filing. By the time the UK
Patent Office is ready to conduct a search of the prior art (information already in the public
There is
considerable
duplication of
effort
Patents are
granted
nationally
77
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
domain),
1
it is likely that the Patent Office in the country of first filing has already conducted
such a search. In 2005, the UK Patent Office examined nearly 5,000 patents that had already
undergone search in at least one other jurisdiction.
2
5.7
Parallel search is undesirable for a number of reasons:
â˘
cost
â patent applicants must pay fees to e
v
ery national patent office to search
and examine an application. Although the criteria for patentability and the
prior art in the USA and Japan
3
are slightly different from those in the UK, the
material that will be searched by an examiner will be similar. Accordingly,
conducting multiple searches is a waste of resources. In 2002, UK companies
filed 2,060 PCT applications. If protection were sought throughout Europe, the
USA and Japan, each of these patents would be searched and examined by the
European Patent Office (EPO), Japanese Patent Office (JPO) and United States
Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO). The total cost for the searches would
be around ÂŁ
1
,350.
4
By contrast, the application and search fees in the UK are
only ÂŁ
1
30;
5
â˘
time delays
â this duplication of effort increases national patent officesâ
workloads and creates backlogs. The USA had a backlog of nearly half a
million applications in 2005.
6
This increases the amount of time taken to issue
patent protection, which adds to costs for the applicant and adds to the time
that follow-on inno
v
ators ha
v
e to wait before they can access information
contained in the patent and build on it themsel
v
es. The UK Patent Office does
not ha
v
e extensi
v
e delays and is able to start processing applications in most
fields of technology soon after they are filed, but problems are still faced by
British businesses and indi
v
iduals when filing patents abroad. This can also
cause a drain on resources in de
v
eloping countries, many of whose patent
offices are engaged largely in issuing IP protection for foreign in
v
entors; and
â˘
lower quality
â in response to these spiralling backlogs many patent offices
ha
v
e set targets to speed up patent applications. Howe
v
er, this has led to fears
that searches will be less thorough and that consequently patents granted
could be subject to more legal challenges, leading to greater uncertainty.
5.8
One solution to this problem is to establish work sharing arrangements between the
v
arious patent offices around the world. Patent offices would share information on patent
search (and possibly also examination results) where it is rele
v
ant to the application for a
patent in another country. Further harmonisation of patent law, for example on patentable
subject matter, would naturally expand the scope for work sharing.
7
5.9
Any work sharing will require national offices to produce reliable searches and
examinations upon which other offices will be able to base patent grants. The table below
illustrates which areas of patent applications could be co
v
ered by work sharing arrangements
between Japan, the USA and Europe.
78
The Gowers Review
1
Under section 17 of the Patents Act 1977.
2
UKPO Annual Report,
2006.
3
The USA and Japan are both ârelative noveltyâ countries meaning that use of a patent outside the USA or, as the case may
be, Japan does not anticipate the invention. This contrasts with the EPO and UK, which both adopt âabsolute noveltyâ
standards meaning use anywhere in the world will anticipate the invention.
4
Based on Patent Office data â EPO: application/filing ÂŁ109, search ÂŁ653 and designation fee ÂŁ51, USPTO:
application/filing ÂŁ172, search ÂŁ286, JPO: application/filing ÂŁ79.
5
See Patents (Fees) Rules 1998 (SI 1998/1778), Part A of the Schedule.
6
http://news.com.com/Patent+Office+chief+endorses+legal+reform/2100-1028_3-5683954.html.
7
This may be possible as the Substantive Patent Law Treaty progresses.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
Table 5.1: The scope for work sharing between Japan, the USA, and
European Patent Convention (EPC) contracting states
Potential for
Japan
US
EPC
work sharing?
Patentability
Novelty
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inventive
step
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Industrial
application
Yes
Yes
Yes
Continuation in part
Yes
Early publication
Yes
Yes
6 months,
limited
Grace period
6 months
12 months
disclosure
No
Patentable subject
Business
matter
method
Yes
Yes
Plant variety
Yes
Yes
Software
Yes
Yes
Source: Japanese Patent Office.
5.10
The JPO has been acti
v
e in looking at useful, long-term solutions to accelerate patent
applications and reduce duplication of effort. Its solution is known as the âPatent Prosecution
Highwayâ (PPH) and in
v
ol
v
es mutual sharing of search and examination results between an
Office of First Filing and an Office of Second Filing. The JPO explains how the proposed
solution would work:
âOn condition that patent application X is determined to be allowable in Country A,
the corresponding patent application X in country B will be deemed as qualified for
accelerated examination through a simple procedure.â
8
5.11
Trilateral discussions between the EPO, JPO and USPTO ha
v
e resulted in a pilot of the
PPH being agreed between the JPO and USPTO.
5.12
The UK has already contracted out some search and examination work to the Danish
and Netherlands Patent Offices with high success rates. This is different from work sharing as
it is simply using extra capacity at other national patent offices to perform searches on behalf
of the UK Patent Office. Ne
v
ertheless, it demonstrates that one office can ha
v
e confidence in
and rely upon searches conducted by another office. The Patent Office has also been engaging
directly with the USPTO, JPO and EPO to discuss work sharing. Examiner exchanges between
offices ha
v
e shown approximately an 80 per cent identical response to search
9
, which is a
promising basis on which to build.
79
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 18:
The Government should encourage the EPO to pursue work
sharing with the USPTO and JPO.
8
Patent Prosecution Highway: Solution to Timing of Work and Maximisation of Benefits of Exploitation of Other Officesâ Search
Results
, Japanese Patent Office, 2006.
9
Patent Office Information.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
C o m m u n i t y Pa t e n t
5.13
In
1
973, the members of the EEC at that time and others, including Switzerland,
created the European Patent Con
v
ention (EPC). The EPC pro
v
ides a single standard for
patentability across the contracting states
1
0
and established the EPO. Under this regime, a
patent application undergoes search and examination at the EPO. If the application is granted
it leads to a bundle of national patents. Any infringement or re
v
ocation actions
11
are
conducted in relation to each national patent.
5.14
While the EPO regime is preferable to a system of wholly independent national
patents there are a number of problems:
â˘
parallel litigation
â
once a patent has been granted by the EPO, each patent is
subject to the laws and procedures of the states in which it applies. No
v
erdict
by one national court can bind the decision of another. This means that if a
patent proprietor successfully pro
v
es in one country that this patent has been
infringed the judgment does not bind, and does not e
v
en necessarily predict,
the outcome in another state. One famous instance of di
v
ergent
v
erdicts was
the Epilady case where the UK and German courts reached opposite
v
erdicts.
1
2
As well as being costly to litigate similar infringements in separate states, the
current system increases uncertainty for patent proprietors;
â˘
renewal fees
â
after the EPO has granted the patent, any further renewal fees
are paid to national offices, rather than a single renewal fee being paid to the
EPO. This unnecessarily adds to patent renewal costs. The approximate cost to
renew a European patent, across only six countries,
1
3
o
v
er ten years is ÂŁ3,8
1
0
in renewal fees.
1
4
In the USA, renewal fees to the tenth year are ÂŁ
1
,830.
1
5
In this
estimate, the size of the market in terms of population would be
approximately 377 million compared to a market of 298 million in the USA;
1
6
â˘
translation costs
â
at present, a European patent will only be
v
alid if it is
translated (or applied for) in the language of the rele
v
ant country.
1
7
Therefore,
a patent application filed in English would not ha
v
e effect in France or
Germany until it is translated into respecti
v
ely French and German. The cost
EPO patent
applications
result in a
bundle of
national patents
80
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 19:
Patent Office should pursue work sharing arrangements with
EPC member States, and trilaterally with the USA and Japan to reduce cross-national
duplication of effort.
10
It adopted much of the earlier Convention on the Unification of Certain Points of Substantive Law on Patents for
Invention (Strasbourg Convention), which was another Council of Europe Convention.
11
It is, however, possible to oppose the grant of a European patent centrally provided this is done with 9 months of grant.
12
http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/cm199899/cmselect/cmtrdind/380/9051106.htm. The cases are reported at
Improver
v
Remington
(1989) RPC 69 (UK);
Improver
v
Sicommerce/Remington
(1990) IIC 572 (Ger). Different reasoning was also given in
the Netherlands, see Beska & Remington/Improver (1990) IIC 586 (Hague, CA) and (1990) IIC 589 (Hague, DC).
13
Renewal in all signatory states to the EPO would, of course, be far greater.
14
Based on an average patent which is issued in 6 states. Years 3-4 EPO renewal fees; years 5-10 member state renewal
fees. Estimate source: Treasury analysis of Patent Office data.
15
Patent Office Data.
16
Based on UK, Germany, France, Spain, Italy and Switzerland estimated population.
17
The rights accruing on publication (under section 69 of the Patents Act 1977) presently only apply where an English
translation of the specification is available: but see the Patents (Translations) Rules 2005 (SI 2005/687) which will remove
this requirement if, and when, the London Agreement comes into effect.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
of translations substantially increases the cost and introduces delays for the
applicant, as well as lengthening the time it takes for other inno
v
ators to
v
iew
the details of the patent.
5.15
A proposed solution is a unitary Community Patent (COMPAT). This would be a
single right co
v
ering the whole community with single application and litigation procedures.
The Re
v
iew strongly belie
v
es COMPAT would resol
v
e the issue of duplicated litigation and
also make the le
v
els of renewal fees more rational and cost effecti
v
e. The Re
v
iew recognises
that difficulties remain surrounding translations. In particular the fact that a patent
application filed and granted in some Community languages may be difficult for inno
v
ators
in the United Kingdom to understand without paying for their own translations.
1
8
Howe
v
er, it
belie
v
es that these problems can be o
v
ercome and that, on balance, the ad
v
antages of such a
system greatly outweigh the disad
v
antages in the long term. Accordingly, the Re
v
iew supports
a workable Community Patent. In the meantime, there are interim approaches such as EPLA
and the London Agreement, which can deli
v
er real benefits and work with the grain of an
e
v
entual COMPAT solution.
T h e L o n d o n A g r e e m e n t
5.16
Once the EPO has granted a patent it is necessary for a translation to be filed before
the resulting national patent has effect in a particular country.
1
9
The a
v
erage length patent
application, at 22 pages, costs approximately ÂŁ950 to translate. Assuming this is translated
into fi
v
e different languages, the a
v
erage number of foreign states for which protection is
sought, it will cost ÂŁ4,700. If it were translated into the languages of all states contracting to
the EPC it would cost ÂŁ20,200.
20
5.17
The problem caused by translation costs has been recognised for many years. In 2000,
the signatory states of the EPO negotiated the London Agreement. This Agreement pro
v
ides
that an application filed in any of the official languages of the EPO (English, French or
German) need not be translated into any other language to take effect in a country which has
ratified the Agreement. The right to require that claims are translated at the time of grant into
languages other than the official languages would be retained.
5.18
In order to come into force, the London Agreement must be ratified by eight
contracting states, including France, Germany and the UK. It currently has eight signatories,
including Germany and the UK, and requires ratification by the French to come into force.
The London Agreement has been strongly supported by many responses to the Call for
E
v
idence, including the Stockholm Network and Microsoft who note that translations of
patents into each countryâs national language account for the biggest part of European
patent costs.
Translation costs
for European
patents are high
81
The Gowers Review
18
The problem may be worse in other member States as it is likely that most applications would be filed in either English
or German if COMPAT trends follow those of the EPO.
19
See the note above on the rights accruing on publication.
20
The London Agreement: European Patents and the Cost of Translations,
EPO, 2006.
Recommendation 20:
Continue to support and expedite the establishment of a single
Community Patent through negotiations in Europe.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.19
Gi
v
en the significant benefits of the London Agreement, the UK should continue to
work with the French Go
v
ernment towards ratification.
2
1
It should also encourage other EPC
States to ratify the Agreement.
Q u a l i t y a s s u r a n c e
5.20
Patent quality refers to how well the patent was prepared and examined and how well
the patent meets patentability requirements. Patent quality is different from technical merit
and patent
v
alue. The patent for a truly pioneering in
v
ention can be poorly prepared and
examined and therefore of high technical merit but low quality. A patent for a commercially
insignificant in
v
ention can be optimally prepared and examined and therefore of high quality
but low
v
alue. It is crucial that patents awarded are not too broad in scope and meet the
patentability criteria, otherwise inno
v
ation will be stunted.
5.21
If a high proportion of patents that are challenged are held to be
v
alid, this suggests
the granting office has granted a high quality patent. Con
v
ersely, high numbers of patents
being declared in
v
alid suggests poor quality patents ha
v
e been awarded. Re
v
ocation
proceedings determine whether the patent grant is
v
alid, and can also therefore be used as an
indication of patent quality. It is common practice for a declaration of in
v
alidity to be
included as a counter-claim to an infringement claim.
22
5.22
Legal proceedings that result in the remo
v
al of poor quality patents will impro
v
e the
quality of the stock of patents. More importantly, the quality of new patents being awarded
can be impro
v
ed. This can be achie
v
ed by a stringent application of the no
v
elty test and the
in
v
enti
v
e step test, by more obser
v
ations being submitted, or by introducing pre-grant
opposition procedures.
5.23
The UK Patent Office has generally shown that it grants patents of a good quality. In
recognition of the quality of work at the UK Patent Office, the Office recei
v
ed âISO 900
1
:2000â
re-certification for its pre-grant patenting process in 2006 with the award extended to co
v
er
its commercial patent search ser
v
ices operation. ISO is the International Standard for quality
management systems. The UK Patent Office is the first Patent Office in the world to attain and
retain this award. Howe
v
er, there is still scope to impro
v
e the performance of the Office.
5.24
One important factor in maintaining quality of grant is ensuring that patents are
examined properly for whether they in
v
ol
v
e an âin
v
enti
v
e stepâ.
23
In recognition of this, this UK
Patent Office ran a consultation on the in
v
enti
v
e step requirement during the period of this
Re
v
iew.
24
The results of that consultation are yet to be published. The Re
v
iew agrees with the
Patent Office that it is important that the âin
v
enti
v
e stepâ is set at the correct le
v
el. If it is set
too high, not enough patents will be granted for genuinely in
v
enti
v
e products. It is also
important for international coherence: if the UK Patent Office makes it too difficult to satisfy
High quality
patents should
avoid impeding
competition
82
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 21:
Government should support the London Agreement as an
interim step towards COMPAT, and as an improvement in its own right.
21
It should be noted that the French Constitutional Court has ruled that the ratification of the London Agreement would
not be contrary to the French Constitution: Decision 2006-541 â 28th September 2006.
22
Of course, as so few patents are litigated, decisions in invalidity cases are not always indicative of the number of patents
not reaching quality levels, particularly as it is likely that only the âlowerâ quality patents reach litigation rather than settle
earlier in the dispute.
23
The requirement to have an inventive step is set out in section 3 of the Patents Act 1977, which states that something
involves an inventive step of it is not obvious to a person skilled in the art, having regard to any matter which forms the
state of the art (also see EPC Article 56).
24
The consultation document is available at: www.patent.gov.uk/consult-inventive.pdf.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
the in
v
enti
v
e step requirement, but the EPO has a lower standard, applicants will simply
apply to the EPO ensuring their applications are treated more generously. If the in
v
enti
v
e step
is too low, too many non-inno
v
ati
v
e patents could be granted which pre
v
ent genuine
inno
v
ators from obtaining IP rights.
5.25
Once a patent application has been published,
25
it is possible for obser
v
ations on the
patent to be filed by a third party.
26
Third parties place obser
v
ations drawing attention to facts
they belie
v
e ha
v
e a material bearing on whether the patent should be granted, and what
scope it should ha
v
e. The examiner decides how to take account of obser
v
ations.
Obser
v
ations are useful as they pro
v
ide more information to the examiner. The obser
v
ation
procedures at the UKPO are rarely used: only about
1
in 200 applications which undergo
substanti
v
e examination (where a patent examiner determines whether a patent meets the
criteria for grant) ha
v
e obser
v
ations filed against them. There is limited incenti
v
e for
companies to file obser
v
ations against a competitor if they are aware of prior art, instead they
may be able to force a licence post grant by exerting that prior art. Also, those who file
obser
v
ations are not in
v
ol
v
ed in the obser
v
ation process and are only informed of the
outcome. The graph below shows the number of obser
v
ations at the UK Patent Office in 2004
and 2005, with a slight increase in the last year.
5.26
Obser
v
ations made under this procedure are known as âsection 2
1
â obser
v
ations. The
process for making obser
v
ations should be streamlined to encourge use. The Patent Office
should undertake initiati
v
es to make patents against which obser
v
ations can be filed clearer
and easier to
v
iew, and therefore make it easier to access the obser
v
ations process. Awareness
of the obser
v
ation process should be raised through the Patent Office website. Online file
inspection should allow easier access for the third party raising the obser
v
ation to
v
iew the
83
The Gowers Review
Source: Patent Office data.
Chart 5.1: Observations made on patentability at the
UK Patent Office 2004-2005
Applications with observations filed
Number of obser
vations
Observations rejected (application granted or terminated)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
2005
2004
35
47
5
25
This is normally 18 months after the (declared) priority date: see rule 27 of the Patents Rules 1995.
26
Section 21 of the Patents Act 1977.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
discussion between the applicant and the examiner. This would make it easier for the third
party to make points of clarification if necessary, assisting the patent examiner to make a
better judgement.
5.27
The EPO has patent oppositions
post
-grant. The oppositions allow a party to
challenge the grant of a European patent within nine months of it being granted.
27
This
procedure was introduced to allow for a single challenge to be made to the European patent
rather than requiring re
v
ocation proceedings to be started in each country where the patent
has effect. The opposition procedure at the EPO can take from three to four years and has on
occasion taken as long as sixteen years. During the time the European patent is subject to
opposition it lea
v
es the extent of the patent proprietorâs rights in doubt. The Re
v
iew does not
therefore recommend patent opposition procedures, either pre-grant or post-grant, at the UK
Patent Office, because they can add significant time delays to patent grants. The Re
v
iew
outlines a number of other recommendations to impro
v
e the quality of patents.
5.28
Professor Beth No
v
eck, Director of Institute for Information Law and Policy at the
New York Law School, has recommended a system of Community Patent Re
v
iew.
28
Her
proposal is intended to harness the collecti
v
e knowledge of experts through the Internet in
order to help patent examiners find the right citations. The public is in
v
ited to submit prior
art
v
ia a webpage, which can then be rated by the community. The rewards for submitting
prior art are largely reputational.
5.29
The intention of No
v
eckâs project is to ensure that bad patent applications are not
granted and to narrow claims in applications in order to narrow the scope of protection. The
project should also accelerate the process of searching prior art at the patent offices and
enhance the assumption of patent
v
alidity. Ultimately, it should impro
v
e the quality of the
patents granted. The diagram below shows how the Community Patent Re
v
iew process is
designed.
Community
Patent Review
could improve
quality of patents
granted
84
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 22:
Maintain a high quality of patents awarded by increasing the use
of âsection 21â observations: streamlining procedures and raising awareness.
27
Part V of the EPC.
28
Peer to Patent: Collective Intelligence for our Intellectual Property System
, Noveck B., 2006.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.30
The USPTO will launch a one-year pilot of âopen re
v
iewâ in early 2007 which will
in
v
ol
v
e 250-400 patents.
29
Se
v
eral large software firms ha
v
e agreed to their patent applications
being put through Community Re
v
iew. This Re
v
iew belie
v
es that the Community Re
v
iew
process could significantly enhance the quality of patents granted. Gi
v
en the different context
of the UK market, the Re
v
iew belie
v
es that a pilot should be conducted in parallel in the UK
in 2007.
5.31
Many newer areas of science are mo
v
ing exceptionally quickly, such that inno
v
ators
and patent examiners may be unaware of much prior art of rele
v
ance to patent applications.
5.32
The training patent examiners recei
v
e in new areas of new technology should be
increased to ensure that all patents granted are of a high quality. The Patent Office trialling of
patent clustering techniques should be used to identify future technology hotspots and thus
enable the training of patent examiners to be more pre-empti
v
e in these areas. Increasing ties
between research establishments and the Patent Office can help facilitate this. This stream of
work as well as Community Patent Re
v
iew can be taken forward through the Patent Office for
the 2
1
st Century programme.
85
The Gowers Review
Chart 5.2: Community Patent Review process diagram
Source: Community Patent Review Project Summary
Recommendation 23:
The Patent Office should conduct a pilot of Beth Noveckâs
Community Patent Review in 2007 in the UK to determine whether this would have a
positive impact on the quality of the patent stock.
Recommendation 24:
The Patent Office should develop stronger links with universities
and other research institutions, including through short placements, to ensure that IP
examiners are aware of recent developments in technology.
29
Community Patent Review project summary, accessed at http://dotank.nyls.edu/communitypatent.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
F a s t Tr a c k s y s t e m f o r p a t e n t s a n d t r a d e m a r k s
5.33
The processing time for applications for patents and trade marks is especially
important in areas of fast-mo
v
ing technology where product lifecycles are reducing. It
currently takes between six and nine months from filing a trade mark application for it to be
granted (including three months for opposition proceedings). For patents, the a
v
erage time
between the filing of a request for substanti
v
e examination to the patent being granted is
eighteen months and the a
v
erage time from the date of filing of an application to the patent
being granted was 28 months in 2005.
30
This is significantly faster than the a
v
erage time from
filing to grant at the EPO, which was 46.2 months in 2004,
3
1
but in a fast mo
v
ing business
en
v
ironment there are clearly ad
v
antages in streamlining the system further.
5.34
Delays in grant time reduce the attracti
v
eness of technologies to potential in
v
estors,
which can be a particular problem for SMEs. Speed to market is the single biggest issue for
successful, inno
v
ati
v
e companies. Consequently, pro
v
iding timely protection for patents and
trade marks is crucial.
5.35
The Patent Office already pro
v
ides a fast track ser
v
ice for accelerated examination,
and combined patent search and examination (CSE) neither of which incur a greater fee. In
2005-06, a third of applications going through examination were for combined search and
examination or accelerated examination not under the CSE process.
32
Lack of use of this
system may result from a lack of knowledge of the a
v
ailability of the process or from strategic
decisions by business in order to delay grant. Some businesses may prefer a slower process as
this establishes their priority date o
v
er an idea, and gi
v
es them extra time to de
v
elop their
product before deciding whether to incur the full costs of registration. Others will seek fast
grants to pro
v
ide certainty.
5.36
The EPO project BEST (Bringing Examination and Search Together) is similar to the
CSE a
v
ailable at the UK Patent Office. This is intended to impro
v
e efficiency at the EPO and
reduce backlogs. This has allowed applicants to ha
v
e a single point of contact and thus
impro
v
ed end-to-end ser
v
ice. It was used for
1
24,000 searches and 30,500 examinations in
2004.
33
5.37
Clearly, to some extent there is a trade-off between awarding rights quickly and
awarding rights of a high quality. For example, it can take up to two years for rele
v
ant prior art
to appear on external search databases, so speeding up the grant process means prior art
cannot be fully assessed before grant. For this reason standard grant procedures carry less risk
of an unpublished parallel application emerging after grant. The current patent fast track
system a
v
ailable should be impro
v
ed to allow for a comprehensi
v
e, âaccelerated grantâ
process. This should enable rights to come into effect more quickly.
Fast track
services for
patents exist
Patents and
trade marks
should be
granted quickly
86
The Gowers Review
30
Patent Office Data.
31
European Patent Office Annual Report
, 2004.
32
Patent Office Data.
33
EPO Business Report
, 2004.
Recommendation 25a:
Introduce accelerated grant process for patents to complement
the accelerated examination and combined patent search and examination procedures.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.38
In todayâs fast mo
v
ing business en
v
ironment products are regularly launched within
short timescales. The Patent Office recently consulted on ending the practice of refusing
applications on the (relati
v
e) grounds
34
that the mark applied for conflicts with an earlier
trade mark.
35
The Re
v
iew supports the proposal of the Patent Office to end such refusals and
to continue searches for the purpose of notifying applicants and others. The Re
v
iew also
notes that this will potentially make it possible to speed up the processing of trade mark
applications. The Re
v
iew proposes that a fast track system (in addition to the normal system)
should be a
v
ailable to allow for trade marks to be examined and accepted within
1
0 days of
the application being filed. Once the application is accepted it can be published and
thereafter the 3-month opposition period would begin. This fast track system should be
accompanied by a higher fee.
U S E
5.39
It should be as easy as possible to buy, sell, license, securitise and obser
v
e IP rights
both in the UK, and for British firms abroad. Moreo
v
er, competition authorities must ha
v
e the
ability to curb any abuse of monopoly power stemming from IP rights.
B u s i n e s s a d v i c e
5.40
Businesses negotiating the complexity of the IP system require ad
v
ice concerning:
application for IP; legal ad
v
ice on how to defend IP; and ad
v
ice on how to manage IP
internationally. Legal ad
v
ice in particular is expensi
v
e. While these costs fall on all businesses,
they are particularly onerous for SMEs, as NESTA highlighted in its submission. Public
pro
v
ision of IP ad
v
ice in the UK is currently patchy.
5.41
The Patent Office has run IP awareness initiati
v
es for businesses. It also pro
v
ides
information to Companies House, which is passed to new companies when they register.
While users ha
v
e found this information beneficial, more can be done. Currently information
pro
v
ided to new businesses through Companies House focuses exclusi
v
ely on the means of
trade marking the company name. Pro
v
iding generic information to all enterprises through
Companies House is a cost-effecti
v
e way of reaching business. The Patent Office could
supplement this ad
v
ice by pro
v
iding a basic guide to the IP system. It could usefully include
information about what types of IP rights exist, what kind of ideas they apply to, and how they
can be obtained and used.
5.42
In addition to pro
v
iding information when a business is set up, it is important to
increase awareness of IP for the existing businesses. One interesting example of ad
v
ice
pro
v
ided to SMEs is the IP Genesis project in France, described in Box 5.
1
below.
Businesses
have limited
knowledge of IP
Trade mark
registration
87
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 25b:
Introduce fast track registration for trade marks.
34
See section 5 of the Trade Marks Act 1994.
35
The Consultation is available at: http://www.patent.gov.uk/consult-relative.pdf; and the responses are published at
http://www.patent.gov.uk/response-relative.pdf.
Recommendation 26:
The Patent Office should provide comprehensive information on
how to register and use IP rights for firms registering with Companies House.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.43
The Patent Office could ensure that the information it pro
v
ides reaches business
through greater collaboration with Business Link offices. Currently this relationship is fairly
ad hoc. A more formal relationship could entail Business Link collecting and distributing best
practice data alongside Patent Office information. In addition it should inform the Patent
Office what businessesâ questions are in relation to IP. This symbiotic relationship would
enable the Patent Office to tailor information pro
v
ision and specific ad
v
ice programmes to
emerging business needs.
5.44
Businesses are particularly unaware of the international system of IP rights. The
Confederation of British Industry (CBI) estimates that approximately 70 per cent of
businesses are unaware that domestic IP does not pro
v
ide protection abroad. Gi
v
en this low
knowledge of foreign IP regimes, it is unsurprising that UK firms take out little foreign IP. The
UK ranks fifteenth in terms of triadic patent applications per million population. And in 2002,
only 4.8 per cent of EPO applications came from the UK compared to
1
9.
1
per cent from
Germany, 27.3 per cent from the USA and
1
7.4 per cent from Japan.
36
Notwithstanding the fact
that patent quality is more important than pure numbers, the le
v
el of UK applications seems
inordinately lower that than for other comparable economic areas. Impro
v
ed business ad
v
ice
on patenting abroad should aim to increase international applications and subsequently
increase presence of UK businesses in international markets. As well as filing a small amount
of patents in Europe, the UK is lagging behind in Chinese patent applications, as Chart 5.3
shows.
88
The Gowers Review
Box 5.1: Case study - French Patent Office IP Genesis
The project IP Genesis at the French Industrial Property Office offers a free IP audit to
SMEs who are not using the IP system, especially the patent system. This encourages these
SMEs to consider IP in a strategic fashion having received expert advice. The service was
used by 464 French SMEs in 2005, the vast majority of which were for SMEs with between
1 and 20 employees. The level of satisfaction with the project was high and 51 per cent of
participating firms subsequently applyed for some form of registered IP protection.
a
Clearly, the increase in the levels of IP is not a measure of success in itself, but indicates
that the firms who had participated in the scheme had increased awareness of IP and how
it might be applicable to their business.
a
PrĂŠ-diagnostics propriĂŠtĂŠ industrielle, INPI (French Industrial Property Office), 2006.
Recommendation 27:
Improve SME business IP support by establishing formal
collaboration between the Patent Office and Business Link and by conducting a pilot
replicating the French âIP Genesisâ scheme.
36
Compendium of Patent Statistics
, OECD, 2005.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.45
Currently, information is pro
v
ided to UK firms expanding abroad by UK Trade and
In
v
estment, an agency of the DTI. Other countries, such as Japan, ha
v
e links with key
embassies abroad to ensure that either there is an IP expert at the embassy or there is a link
between embassies to offer tailored ad
v
ice. IP Australia has established a Marketing
Department that pro
v
ides IP guides, multimedia products, case studies and seminars.
K n o w l e d g e t r a n s f e r / l i c e n s i n g
5.46
As discussed in Chapter 2, licensing of IP is increasing. Licensing agreements are
generally complex and there are no industry wide standard contracts. The time taken to
negotiate licences
v
aries depending on the relationship between the parties, for example
whether the interaction is friendly or ad
v
ersarial. Strained licensing negotiations last on
a
v
erage 3-5 years, and e
v
en mutually beneficial negotiations can last approximately 6
months. A delay in getting to market can threaten a companyâs position, especially in areas of
fast mo
v
ing technology such as the computer industry. This was highlighted in se
v
eral
responses to the Call for E
v
idence. In addition to being slow, licensing can be costly.
5.47
The Lambert Re
v
iew of Business-Uni
v
ersity collaboration
37
recommended model
agreements between businesses and uni
v
ersities. These agreements, de
v
eloped in
consultation with stakeholders, reduce the transaction costs and pro
v
ide a fair and
transparent contractual arrangement for both parties.
Licensing is
crucial to firms
89
The Gowers Review
Source: SIPO statistics, 2005.
Chart 5.3: Top ten foreign countries, and the UK, filing
patent applications in China, per million inhabitants, 2005
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
UK (18th)
France
USA
Denmark
Germany
Sweden
Finland
South Korea
Netherlands
Switzerland
Japan
Applications per million inhabitants
Recommendation 28:
DTI should investigate how best to provide practical IP advice to
UK firms operating in foreign markets, in coordination with industry bodies, the Patent
Office and UK Trade and Investment.
37
Accessed at: www.hm-treasury.gov.uk/media/DDE/65/lambert_Review_final_450.pdf.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.48
Since the introduction of the model agreements, the le
v
el and quality of business â
uni
v
ersity collaboration has impro
v
ed.
38
The model licences should be extended to pro
v
ide a
selection of business-to-business model licences. These should help to reduce the time and
costs of licensing. As an association of blacksmiths noted in its response to the call for
e
v
idence: âa set of standard a
v
ailable templates would help with licences.â Such licences
would be particularly useful for SMEs.
5.49
The Patent Office should start to de
v
elop such licenses through Go
v
ernment-
Industry working groups. Analysis of the current Lambert agreements and their strengths and
weaknesses in practice should inform the new model agreements. In particular, one or more
model licences should be de
v
eloped to assist firms wishing to negotiate licences with
partners at home and abroad.
5.50
One means of increasing the use of information contained in patents is through
âlicence of rightâ patents. Under licence of right pro
v
isions the patent proprietor pays only
half the patent renewal fee.
39
In exchange, a third party can apply for a licence as of right
under terms agreed between the parties, or, failing agreement, by the comptroller, who is the
Chief Executi
v
e of the Patent Office. Licences of right can increase liquidity in the market.
Howe
v
er, the take up of these licences is low, at around 0.5 per cent of patent renewals, and
has not increased in recent years. This is partly due to a lack of awareness, especially among
small businesses, and partly due to the unattracti
v
eness of negotiating licensing agreements.
If a model licence was a
v
ailable for licences of right, this could make them significantly more
appealing. In addition to pro
v
iding a model licence, the Patent Office should publicise the
patents a
v
ailable as licences of right. This would enable inno
v
ators to identify rapidly what
patents rele
v
ant to their area of R&D are a
v
ailable as licences of right.
P u b l i c d o m a i n v i s i b i l i t y
5.51
After IP protection expires the ideas and their expressions fall into the public domain.
In the public domain this knowledge can be used by follow-on inno
v
ators. A good example of
an idea which was ne
v
er de
v
eloped whilst co
v
ered by patent protection, but subsequently
became hugely profitable in the public domain, is Whittleâs jet engine. The Patent Office
currently publishes both UK patents and European patents (UK) which ha
v
e expired. These
are a
v
ailable as a list of Patent numbers in the Patents and Designs Journal, published
regularly online by the Patent Office. Howe
v
er, the current format is rather inaccessible.
5.52
The Patent Office should make the publication of in
v
entions which are a
v
ailable for
use more accessible. An easily accessible, open standards database should be pro
v
ided that
people can draw upon to identify in
v
entions in the public domain. The in
v
entions should be
grouped by subject, with a brief description of the in
v
ention so that they can be easily
identified. This should link to esp@cenet patent entries for maximum transparency.
Licence of right
patents
Model licences
facilitate
agreements
90
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 29:
The Patent Office should develop âBusiness-to-Businessâ model IP
licences through industry consultation, and assessment of the Lambert model licences.
Recommendation 30a:
The Patent Office should publish and maintain an open
standards web database, linked to the EPOâs esp@cenet web database, containing all
patents issued under licence of right.
38
Higher Education Business and Community Survey 2005
, HEFCE, 2005 accessed at http://www.hefce.ac.uk.
39
Section 46 (3) (d) of the Patents Act 1977.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
A c c e s s t o f i n a n c e
5.53
As discussed in Chapter 2, despite the rising importance of intangible assets, current
accounting standards in the EU and USA do not satisfactorily capture their
v
alue. According
to the Intellectual Assets Centre, businesses are often under
v
alued by up to 80 per cent
because they fail to take account of their intangible assets.
40
This is especially problematic in
the case of IP that has been internally generated, rather than purchased or licensed for a fee.
If intangible assets are not properly accounted for this will lead to sub-optimal in
v
estment
decisions being taken by in
v
estors.
5.54
As a result of poor
v
aluation of intellectual assets, companies encounter problems
raising
v
enture capital. Access to finance is especially problematic for SMEs. Best practice
guidelines should be de
v
eloped in order to reduce this reporting gap and the subsequent
impact on businesses. The Re
v
iew supports initiati
v
es to amend accounting standards to take
account of intellectual assets and in the meantime encourages firmsâ
v
oluntary use of an IP
report. An IP report would help to focus a firm on its IP and help to explain how a firmâs IP
relates to its strategy. Howe
v
er, this type of reporting is still in its infancy and is not a perfect
solution to the problem.
5.55
In terms of o
v
erall budget, Patent Office fees are generally insignificant
(approximately ÂŁ200 in total to grant a patent) compared to the fees charged by patent agents
(approximately ÂŁ300 per hour).
4
1
The total cost of professional patent filing fees ranges from
ÂŁ
1
,000 to ÂŁ6,000.
42
These fees can be unaffordable to SMEs. The problem of fees from legal
representation is exacerbated when applying for patents abroad as Table 5.2 shows.
Professional
representation
comprises the
bulk of costs
91
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 30b:
The Patent Office should publish and maintain an open
standards web database, linked to esp@cenet containing all expired patents.
Recommendation 31:
DTI should consider whether guidance for firms on reporting of
intangible assets could be improved, including the provision of model IP reports.
40
Annual Review,
Intellectual Assets Centre, 04/05.
41
Call for Evidence submission, Federation of Small Businesses.
42
Patent filing fees for legal advice from Appleyard Lees Patent Attorneys, and Trevor Bayliss Brands plc.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
Table 5.2: Typical legal and administrative costs of an international patent application
Timeline
Stage
International PCT
UK patent
patent application
application
Time âTâ
Filing basic UK priority application
ÂŁ1,500 â ÂŁ7,500
ÂŁ1,500 â ÂŁ7,500
T + 12 months
International filing application
ÂŁ3,500 â ÂŁ4,000
â
T + 16 months
UK statement of inventorship
ÂŁ600 â ÂŁ1,500
ÂŁ600 â ÂŁ1,500
T + 17 months
Demand for international preliminary examination
ÂŁ1,700
â
T + 2 years
Response to international preliminary report
ÂŁ500 â ÂŁ1,500
â
T + 2.5 years
Entry to National/Regional phase
USA
ÂŁ1,500 â ÂŁ2,000
â
EPO
ÂŁ2,000 â ÂŁ5,000
â
Japan
ÂŁ4,000
â
Other countries
ÂŁ1,500 â ÂŁ4,000
1
â
T + 3.5 years
Examination under National phase
USA
ÂŁ2,000 â ÂŁ5,000
â
EPO
ÂŁ0 â ÂŁ2,000
â
Japan
ÂŁ2,000 â ÂŁ5,000
â
Other countries
ÂŁ500 â ÂŁ1,500
â
T + 4.5 years
Grant procedures
USA
ÂŁ1,500
â
EPO
ÂŁ18,000 â ÂŁ28,000
1
â
Minimum likely total cost
(USA/EPO/Japan)
ÂŁ38,800
Maximum likely total cost
(USA/EPO/Japan)
ÂŁ68,700
Source: Frank B. Dehn & Co. Patent and Trade Mark Attorneys, 2003.
1
Including translation fees.
5.56
In its submission to the Call for E
v
idence, the Federation of Small Businesses
highlighted the prime difficulty for SMEs accessing registered IP rights as cost, mainly in the
area of IP solicitors and firms of patent attorneys. The Re
v
iew is not recommending creating
two fee structures at the Patent Office to allow for cheaper fees for SMEs, on the basis that fees
are already
v
ery cheap at ÂŁ200.
5.57
R&D tax credits are a
v
ailable for SMEs (and now larger corporations) but these
specifically do not co
v
er IP applications. Se
v
eral submissions ha
v
e called for R&D tax credits
to be extended to help pay for patent agents. The Re
v
iew is not recommending extension of
R&D tax credits to pay for the acquisition of IP because acquiring IP is not in itself R&D.
5.58
There are schemes to support SMEs in other countries. For example, the Welsh
Assembly Go
v
ernment pro
v
ide grants at up to 50 per cent of costs (within maximum limits)
to co
v
er patent agent and Patent Office fees. In
v
est Northern Ireland also pro
v
ide matched
funding. Spanish initiati
v
es pro
v
ide soft or interest-free loans to help with national, European
and international patent applications.
43
Enterprise Ireland in some cases will fund the
procedure for obtaining patents in Ireland and abroad; the financial assistance may co
v
er up
to
1
00 per cent of the costs of the process of obtaining the patent. Some royalties from the
product go back to Enterprise Ireland.
44
Other countries
provide support
for SMEs
92
The Gowers Review
43
WIPO Workshop on Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises (SMEs) and Industrial Property,
WIPO, 2002.
44
Ibid.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.59
Some matched funding schemes do exist in England, for example they are pro
v
ided
by SEEDA (South East of England De
v
elopment Agency). European grants are a
v
ailable to
regions such as Yorkshire and South Wales. Howe
v
er, there is no nationally coordinated
approach.
5.60
The best source of information on the a
v
ailable funding in England is from Business
Link. It would be useful to connect regional agencies together to pro
v
ide one coherent source
of what is a
v
ailable so that businesses can be directed to the rele
v
ant agencies by the Patent
Office and other organisations.
5.61
The connection between RDAs and Business Link in terms of funding pro
v
ided
should be impro
v
ed. Better ad
v
ice can then be pro
v
ided to SMEs on where to find financial
support within the boundaries of State Aid rules under Community law. This will complement
measures in Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. These should be a
v
ailable to SMEs and
lone in
v
entors and should focus especially on linking with ad
v
ice on obtaining IP abroad in
order to expand UK firmsâ acti
v
ity in international markets.
5.62
RDA best practice should also be shared to impro
v
e the support pro
v
ided to SMEs
and reduce the burden of patent agent fees. For example, SEEDA has introduced the ser
v
ices
of an IP ad
v
isor in order to support clients. This ser
v
ice can pro
v
ide ad
v
ice at a reduced rate
on matters such as IP audits, assistance with filing an application, pre-application ad
v
ice and
licensing. Such RDA best practice should be shared throughout the UK in order to maximise
the support at reduced professional rates.
C o l l e c t i n g s o c i e t i e s
5.63
Collecting societies licence rights to use copyright protected content to third parties.
They exist to sa
v
e licensees the time and cost of negotiating licences with each indi
v
idual
rights holder. There are se
v
eral music rights organisations in the UK, the main ones being
Mechanical Copyright Protection Society/Performing Rights Society (MCPS/PRS) and
Phonographic Performance Limited (PPL) who collect royalties dependent on the type of
music rights required. A broad range of people pay these collecting societies, including music
and music
v
ideo broadcasters, those who play music on business premises and those who
pro
v
ide music ser
v
ices to mobiles as illustrated in Chart 5.4.
RDAs and
Business Links
should provide a
network of
financial schemes
93
The Gowers Review
Box 5.2: Case study â The Foundation for Finnish Inventions
The Foundation for Finnish Inventions supports and helps private individuals and
entrepreneurs to develop and exploit invention proposals. This can take the form of
general counselling or invention specific advice, evaluation of the market potential and
patentability, funding of patenting and guidance on product development and
commercialisation. Grants or loans are provided which can cover up to 100 per cent of the
costs. The average amount of funding provided per invention is
âŹ
10,000.
Recommendation 32:
Form a working group with Patent Office, RDA and Business Link
representation, to identify and promote best practice to maximise the use of effective
schemes nationwide.
5.64
Owing to the multiplicity of collecting societies, businesses are often required to
obtain se
v
eral licences to co
v
er all the rights required. For example, shop and bar owners ha
v
e
to seek multiple licenses to play music on their premises. In se
v
eral other countries, including
France, Germany and Japan, rights are administered jointly. This can create confusion for
licensees, who ha
v
e to purchase one licence from PPL for the rights in the sound recording
and a second licence from PRS for the rights in the music and the lyrics. Encouraging a
cross-licensing agreement between collecting societies could be highly beneficial to users.
It could also benefit rights holders if the simpler process encourages licensees to take up
more licences.
5.65
Not all rights holders want to licence their work on a commercial basis. Creati
v
e
Commons licences
45
arose to pro
v
ide free licences. Creati
v
e Commons licences help the
owner keep his copyright while in
v
iting some uses of the work: a âsome rights reser
v
edâ
copyright. The project began in the USA, but in recent years country specific licences
(including England and Wales, and Scotland) and are now a
v
ailable. Using the Creati
v
e
Commons website, options can be selected to limit how the work will be used and a model
licence is created straightaway which should satisfy the ownerâs requirements.
5.66
At present, Creati
v
e Commons licences are drafted in such a way that makes it
difficult for collecting societies to manage Creati
v
e Commons licensed works. Collecting
Societies in the UK generally hold an exclusi
v
e licence to collect royalties for the copyright
works that they represent. Therefore, artists who are members of collecting societies are
generally unable to license Creati
v
e Commons licensed indi
v
idual works. This issue does not
arise in the USA where, owing to antitrust regulations, collecting societies take a non-
exclusi
v
e licence to their membersâ works.
Collecting
societies find it
difficult to
manage Creative
Commons
licences
Chart 5.4: A summary of who has to pay collecting societies
PPL
VPL
PRS
MCPS â PRS alliance
MCPS
Playing music in public
Location/premises where music is played
and heard by the public
Broadcasting
Supplying music to
businesses
Digital DJ
UK radio, Internet & television stations
which use sound recordings in
transmissions
Companies who supply music services
to other businesses/individuals
DJs to copy sound recordings onto
computer for use in clubs, pubs etc.
Broadcast and public performance of music videos (+ dubbing for these purposes)
Broadcaster or production company making programmes including videos, use of music videos on the internet or mobile technology playing or showing a music video in public
Play/Supply music on
business premises
Stage live music
event
TV/radio production
& broadcasting
Online music and
mobile phone services
Computer game or
novelty product
Source: Patent Office data.
45
See www.creativecommons.org.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
94
The Gowers Review
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.67
The absence of panâEuropean copyright licences increases the number of licences
that need to be acquired because rights ha
v
e to be negotiated for each state. This increases
transaction costs. There are currently EU initiati
v
es to encourage direct cross border licensing
for online music rather than through bilateral agreements. Other forms of copyright such as
licensing of li
v
e music performances do not generally encounter the same issues as they are
used in a specific geographic area. The European Commission is currently considering ways
of increasing the transparency of collecting society operations and introducing competition
between existing European societies.
46
R o l e o f c o m p e t i t i o n a u t h o r i t i e s
5.68
It is important that competition authorities scrutinise the beha
v
iour of those seeking
or holding IP rights. Authorities must ensure that agreements relating to the de
v
elopment
and licensing of IP rights do not contain unnecessary restrictions on competition. And they
must also ensure that businesses with market power do not use IP rights in abusi
v
e ways.
47
5.69
Where a rights holder has a dominant position in the market, imposing an obligation
on them to grant a licence to competitors or third parties (e
v
en in return for a reasonable
royalty) would deny the rights holder the ability to fully exploit their rights. The courts ha
v
e
recognised that such cases are exceptional and would only arise where the refusal by a
dominant undertaking to grant a licence cannot be objecti
v
ely justified and pre
v
ents the
de
v
elopment of the market for which the licence is an indispensable input, to the detriment
of consumers. This may only be the case if the undertaking which requests the licence
intends to produce new goods or ser
v
ices not offered by the IP right owner, for which there is
consumer demand.
48
5.70
It should be noted that the role of competition authorities in regulating IP markets
should not extend to price regulation: patents are exclusi
v
e rights which enable owners to
charge monopoly prices. Howe
v
er, there should be increased collaboration between the
Patent Office, the Competition Commission and the Office of Fair Trading to establish an
understanding of how healthy competition can flourish in the information market and how
IP can both stimulate and occasionally stunt dynamic competition.
EU licensing
arrangements
are complex
95
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 33:
The Review invites the OFT to consider conducting a market
survey into the UK collecting societies to ensure the needs of all stakeholders are being
met.
Recommendation 34:
Increase cooperation between the UK Patent Office, the Office
of Fair Trading and the Competition Commission to ensure that competition and IP policy
together foster competitive and innovative markets for the benefit of consumers.
46
Study on a Community Initiative on the Cross-Border Collective Management of Copyright,
EU Commission, 2005.
47
EC Article 82 and Chapter 2 prohibition under the Competition Act 1998 set out how IP right holders with market
power can behave.
48
See in particular, Joined Cases C-241/91 and C-242/P
Magill
[1995] ECR I-743, and Case C-418/01
IMS Health GmbH &
Co. OHG v NDC Health GmbH & Co. KG
, [2004] ECR I-5039.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
E N F O R C E M E N T
5.71
This section is concerned with enforcement of all types of IP (copyright, trade marks,
designs and patents) against infringement. IP rights, like any other rights, are only as good as
their enforcement. Enforcement of IP rights should be swift, affordable and judicious. The
section sets out four criteria that are necessary for the adequate enforcement of IP rights:
1
.
awareness of rights
â the public must be aware of the rights that exist and find
them reasonable and acceptable;
2.
penalties for infringement
â there must be adequate sanctions to pre
v
ent would-
be infringers from
v
iolating IP rights. Penalties can take the form of legal sanctions,
both criminal and ci
v
il, or non-legal sanctions, such as codes of practice adopted
by bodies to impose penalties on infringers;
3.
pursuit of infringers
â it is crucial that those who ignore the law and the penalties
that support it, are adequately pursued by the rele
v
ant authorities; and
4.
mechanisms to resolve conflict
â once an infringer is apprehended by the rele
v
ant
authority the rights holder must ha
v
e the means to enforce legal sanctions through
the courts, or by some means outside of the courts. Chapter 6 will consider the
reform of the courts. This chapter will examine the scope for Alternati
v
e Dispute
Resolution (ADR), which takes place outside the courts, and European reforms.
R a i s i n g a w a r e n e s s o f r i g h t s
5.72
As highlighted in Chapter 2, consumer awareness of IP in the UK is fairly low. In a
MORI poll, most respondents had to guess what phrase âIntellectual Propertyâ meant.
49
Participants were more aware of elements of IP that are physically obser
v
able such as trade
marks, rather than more abstract forms such as copyright and patents. It is more difficult for
consumers to respect rights if they do not know what they are. Respect for IP rights is low and
copying and counterfeiting are seen by many as â
v
ictimlessâ crimes. Recent research carried
out for the audio
v
isual industry by OTX, showed that
v
ideo piracy was seen as a less se
v
ere
crime than shoplifting and credit card fraud.
50
5.73
The Creati
v
e Industries Forum on IP, a cross-industry body brought together by DTI
and DCMS, de
v
eloped a scheme under the banner of the âCREATEâ principles to explain the
v
alue of IP in todayâs economy. In conjunction with the Patent Office and the Department for
Education and Skills (DfES), DCMS are presenting these principles to a range of audiences
including policy makers and children, to communicate a positi
v
e message on IP. The Patent
Office also de
v
eloped a
v
ery successful resource for schools, the âThink kit
ÂŽ
â.
5.74
In a similar
v
ein, three pri
v
ate sector initiati
v
es stand out as good examples of ways
in which public and industry awareness about IP can be increased:
â˘
British Music Rights are acting as industry sponsors for the âQuickstart Musicâ
Programme, which is intended to bring together enterprise and copyright
education in secondary schools. This programme in
v
ol
v
es setting up a mini-
music enterprise, the students taking a product to market and accruing
v
alue
from the exploitation of their copyright. This initiati
v
e will help to foster an
appreciation of copyright in young people;
Public and
private bodies
are working to
raise awareness
Public knowledge
of IP is low
96
The Gowers Review
49
Intellectual Property: Public Attitudes,
MORI, 2000.
50
Call for Evidence submission, Alliance Against IP Theft.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
â˘
Anti Copying in Design (ACID) has initiated a national IP rights education
programme, the âEducate to Protectâ campaign, aimed at design schools,
uni
v
ersities and SMEs. The programme is based on case studies and practical
solutions aimed at ad
v
ising designers on protecting and fully exploiting IP
rights. This has been set up in response to many smaller designers
experiencing copying of their designs and will help designers maximise profit
from their IP rights; and
â˘
the National Endowment for Science Technology and the Arts (NESTA) has
de
v
eloped and just launched a new module of its mentoring programme
focused on the strategic importance and management of IP â âThe IP
Accelerator.â The module is designed for small inno
v
ati
v
e businesses,
including creati
v
e businesses. Following a successful pilot, NESTA intends to
roll out the programme more widely.
5.75
The Re
v
iew supports and commends education initiati
v
es such as these undertaken
by pri
v
ate and public sector bodies. Education initiati
v
es should extend from school teaching
through to industry, and to general consumer awareness, and should explain the exceptions
to IP rights so that consumers understand the balance in the system.
5.76
In order to raise consumer respect for IP, awareness raising should not just focus on
the damage IP crime does to rights holders. Consumers should be made aware of how their
actions affect local business and other peopleâs li
v
es.
5.77
Many indi
v
iduals and organisations are harmed by IP infringement. For example the
World Health Organization has estimated that up to a tenth of the worldâs medicines are
fake.
5
1
Goods infringing trade marks, such as counterfeit cosmetics, can also be harmful to
consumers. Links between IP crime and organised crime ha
v
e been well documented.
52
Legitimate traders can be forced out of business. A study in the UK on behalf of the British
Anti-Counterfeiting Group estimated the number of jobs lost in the UK due to counterfeiting
is in excess of 4,000.
53
5.78
Other countries ha
v
e raised the profile of IP much more effecti
v
ely than in the UK. In
Japan le
v
els of knowledge on IP are much higher on a
v
erage than in the UK. The French IP
website stresses the consumer safety aspect of counterfeit goods. The Re
v
iew belie
v
es that the
message will ha
v
e more impact if it is presented in a balanced way, highlighting the rights as
well as the responsibilities of consumers. The Consumer Direct website has highlighted
counterfeit goods as an important consumer issue and pro
v
ides ad
v
ice to consumers.
IP crime
affects all
97
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 35:
The Patent Office should continue to raise public awareness,
focussing in particular on the wider impacts of IP crime, and the exceptions to rights.
51
Counterfeit Medicines: Some Frequently Asked Questions,
World Health Organization, 2005.
http://www.wpro.who.int/media_centre/fact_sheets/fs_20050506.htm.
52
Proving the connection,
Alliance Against IP Theft, 2006.
53
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/3548928.stm.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
F a i r a n d a d e q u a t e p e n a l t i e s
5.79
The penalty for a copyright offence
54
depends on whether the infringement occurred
online or not. In relation to those who commercially deal in infringing goods
55
or those who
distribute goods other than in the course of business to an extent which prejudicially affects
the rights holder
56
the maximum penalty is ten years imprisonment.
57
In contrast, those who
commit online infringement by communicating the work to the public (whether commercial
or otherwise) may be sentenced to up to two years imprisonment.
58
Finally, the commercial
showing or playing in public of a work carries a maximum of six months imprisonment or a
le
v
el fi
v
e fine.
59
Table 5.3: A summary of the current penalties for online and physical
copyright infringement
Online infringement
Physical infringement
Source: Copyright, Designs and Patent 1988 Act (CDPA) (as amended), Patent Office analysis.
5.80
Se
v
eral submissions ha
v
e called for a change in the law to increase online
infringement penalties to the le
v
els for physical infringement. The intention and impact of
physical and online infringement are the same. Crimes committed in the online and physical
world should not be subject to different sentences. Increasing the penalties for online
infringement will therefore make the law more coherent.
5.81
The Re
v
iew proposes that the penalty for online commercial infringement
60
should be
increased to ten years imprisonment to bring parity with commercially dealing (but not
showing) in pirated works. It proposes that the penalty for consumers infringing online
6
1
to an
extent that prejudicially affects the rights holder should also be extended to ten years, again
to bring parity with physical infringement.
Up to 10 years in prison
and/or unlimited fine
Up to 10 years in prison
and/or unlimited fine
Up to 2 years in prison
and/or unlimited fine
Sentence on indictment
(in Crown court)
Up to 6 months in prison
and/or statutory
maximum fine
Up to 6 months in prison
and/or statutory
maximum fine
Up to 3 months in
prison and/or statutory
maximum fine
Summary sentence (in
magistratesâ courts)
Distributing infringing
copies in course of
business or to extent that
prejudicially affects rights
holder, importing
infringing copy into UK
other than for private or
domestic purposes
Making infringing copies
for sale or hire
Communicating to the
public by electronic
transmission in the
course of a business or
to an extent prejudicially
affecting the right holder
Nature of offence
Legal sanctions
98
The Gowers Review
54
There are similar offences in relation to performersâ rights in section 198 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act
(CDPA) 1988. The arguments equally apply in relation to such offences.
55
E.g. the offence in section 107(1)(a), (b) or (d)(iv) of the CDPA 1988.
56
Section 107(1)(e) of the CDPA 1988.
57
Section 107(4) of the CDPA 1988.
58
Section 107(4A) of the CDPA 1988.
59
Section 107(5) of the CDPA 1988.
60
The offence under section 107(2A)(a) of the CDPA 1988.
61
The offence under section 107(2A)(b) of the CDPA 1988.
Recommendation 36:
Match penalties for online and physical copyright infringement by
amending section 107 of the CDPA by 2008.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.82
One instance of IP infringement which damages rights holdersâ in
v
estment in IP is
Copycat packaging. Copycat packaging is described in the box below.
99
The Gowers Review
Box 5.3: Copycat packaging
Original brand owners bear the costs of trying to prize copycat brands off the market â
either through legal means, or by changing their own designs. The British Brands Group
estimate a decline in sales of up to 20 per cent by the rights holder following the
introduction of the copycat product. Kelloggâs spent ÂŁ1,100,000 on national advertising
campaign to say it does not make cereals for anyone else.
â˘
Business Insights stated that âprivate label success is facilitated when consumers
cannot tell a private label from a manufacturer brand due to similarity in
packaging.â
a
â˘
Similar packaging resulted in a significant 55 per cent increase in own label share
compared to own labels in dissimilar packaging.
â˘
Similar packaging suggests to consumers that the product is definitely or probably
made by the same company, the practice results in 7.5 million shoppers
being misled.
b
â˘
A study by Kapferer showed that similar packaging generated direct correlations
between perceptions of manufacture and perceptions of quality.
c
â˘
Consumers Association Research in 1998 gave further insight into the connection
between packaging and consumer assumptions about products
Supermarket product same or better for
Quality
Value
Copycats
43%
57%
Benchmark
30%
46%
Source: Call for Evidence Submission,
British Brands Group
.
a
Fighting Private Label
, Business Insights, 2005.
b
Ibid.
c
Stealing Brand Equity: Measuring Perceptual Confusion Between National Brands and âCopycatâ Own-Label
Products, Kapferer J-N.,
Marketing and Research Today,
1995.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.83
If a shape or colour of a product has been successfully registered as a trade mark it
would be possible to rely on infringement to stop the copycat. Regardless of whether or not
the appearance of a product is registered, it may be possible to protect it under the common
law tort of âpassing offâ. This requires:
(a)
a party must establish good will or reputation attached to the goods or
ser
v
ices so that it is recognised by the public as distincti
v
e specifically of its
goods or ser
v
ices;
(b)
the party must demonstrate that there has been a misrepresentation by the
other party leading or likely to lead the public to belie
v
e the goods or ser
v
ices
offered by the other person are those of the party; and
(c)
the party must show that it has suffered damage.
62
5.84
Howe
v
er, the Re
v
iew belie
v
es that passing off does not go far enough to protect many
brands and designs from misappropriation for the following reasons:
â˘
if copycats appear on the market before the defendant has built up goodwill in
a certain appearance, the brand owner cannot rely on the law of passing off.
This may pre
v
ent new entrants from adequately protecting the appearance of
their products; and
â˘
it is difficult to demonstrate consumer confusion in court and substantial
e
v
idence may be required to bring a successful passing off action.
5.85
This is often especially rele
v
ant to small designers who are at risk of their designs
being copied before they are able to establish a reputation in the marketplace
5.86
A number of submissions to the Call for E
v
idence called for a general âunfair
competitionâ law to be introduced. For example, the Law Society highlighted the German law
which states that: âacts of unfair competition which are capable of impairing competition to the
disad
v
antage of competitors, consumers or other participants in the market more than
insignificantly are impermissibleâ. The new European Directi
v
e on Unfair Commercial Practices
(UCP Directi
v
e)
63
is in the process of being transposed in to UK law, and will tackle practices that
unfairly impact on consumers, including practices that mislead or confuse consumers.
5.87
The Local Authorities Coordinators of Regulatory Ser
v
ices (LACORS) ha
v
e said that
once this UCP Directi
v
e is in place they will act on behalf of consumers by pursing businesses
who act improperly. There are concerns, howe
v
er, with this Directi
v
e as it relates to business
to consumer interactions, and it may not pro
v
ide sufficient legal sanctions for unfair
âbusiness to businessâ anti-competiti
v
e practices.
5.88
The Go
v
ernment should monitor the success of these measures in combating unfair
competition in cases relating to IP, and if after a suitable time, the measures are not
adequately addressing these problems, the Go
v
ernment should to consult on appropriate
changes.
Reducing unfair
competition will
protect
investment
100
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 37:
Monitor success of current measures to combat unfair
competition in cases relating to IP, and if changes are found to be ineffective, Government
should consult on appropriate changes.
62
This comes from
Reckitts & Colman Products v Borden
(1990) RPC 341, HL
(The Jif Lemon Case)
. There is also an
extended form off passing off which was explained in
Erven Warnick v J. Townsend & Sons
(1980) RPC 31
(The Advocaat
Case).
63
Directive 2005/29/EC on Unfair Commercial Practices.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.89
As a complementary deterrent to IP infringement, changes to damages awarded ha
v
e
been suggested by se
v
eral responses to the Call for E
v
idence. Damage awards should act as a
disincenti
v
e to infringement: infringers should not be able to keep any profits from
infringement, nor to pay any less in compensation than they would ha
v
e paid if they had
purchased or licensed the material legitimately. Some rights holders ha
v
e suggested that the
current system of damages falls some way short of the âeffecti
v
e, proportionate and
dissuasi
v
eâ ci
v
il remedies that the EU Enforcement Directi
v
e requires and that damages
should be increased to pro
v
ide an effecti
v
e and proportionate deterrent to IP infringement.
5.90
The Re
v
iew does not recommend criminalising registered design infringement,
particularly since neither the UK Patent Office nor the Community Office at the OHIM
examine design applications on substanti
v
e grounds (i.e. to determine whether they meet the
requirements for registration). It is also thought that pro
v
ing design infringement (including
unregistered design infringement) to a criminal le
v
el would be extremely difficult.
5.91
A number of respondents to the call for e
v
idence called for camcording in cinemas to
be criminalized. The Re
v
iew belie
v
es that sufficient legislati
v
e responses already exist in ci
v
il
remedies. Camcording in cinemas is a ci
v
il offence and making a copy of a copyright
infringing good for sale or hire is already a criminal offence. Furthermore, the majority of
pirated D
V
Ds originate abroad. The International Federation of the Phonographic Industry
(IFPI), state that the
v
ast majority of pressed pirate discs come from South East Asia and the
UK is not one of its priority countries for targeted action.
64
N o n - l e g i s l a t i v e d e t e r r e n t s t o i n f r i n g e m e n t
5.92
As discussed in Chapter 2 peer-to-peer (P2P) downloading is threatening copyright
protected material. Owing to
v
arious factors, including the multiplicity of potential infringers,
the barriers to efficient and successful challenge and enforcement of copyright against P2P
downloads remains significant. This jeopardises the
v
alue of rights held by content industries.
5.93
The entertainment industry has attempted to address the economic consequences of
new technology by pursing legal actions against indi
v
idual infringers in an attempt to
discourage other indi
v
iduals from engaging in massi
v
e file transfers. Howe
v
er, as Chart 5.5
below shows, such lawsuits ha
v
e not led to a significant reduction in P2P users.
P2P filesharing
Damages
101
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 38:
DCA should review the issues raised in its forthcoming
consultation paper on damages and seek further evidence to ensure that an effective and
dissuasive system of damages exists for civil IP cases and that it is operating effectively. It
should bring forward any proposals for change by the end of 2007.
64
The Recording Industry Commercial Piracy Report,
IFPI, 2004 (can be accessed at http://www.ifpi.org/site-
content/library/piracy2004.pdf).
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.94
Current file-sharing models store the files on the personal computers of the users
with Internet ser
v
ice pro
v
iders (ISPs) as the intermediaries. ISPs currently ha
v
e limited
liability for traffic passing through their network due to certain âsafe harbourâ pro
v
isions.
65
5.95
Stakeholders within the creati
v
e industries ha
v
e proposed a â
V
alue Recognition Rightâ.
This is still being discussed within the industry and was insufficiently de
v
eloped for the
Re
v
iew to take a
v
iew on.
5.96
A new act of secondary infringement has also been suggested which would make
those who facilitate P2P file sharing liable for copyright infringement. Howe
v
er, it has been
argued by public interest groups that imposing secondary liability on technology pur
v
eyors
would stifle the a
v
ailability of public domain works and may chill technological inno
v
ation.
66
If ISPs were liable for content passing through their networks they might limit lawful content,
for fear of breaking the law. There are also doubts that making ISPs liable would be
compatible with Community law.
67
5.97
The USA has the concepts of contributory infringement and inducement, which were
used to find liability in the case of
MGM v Grokster.
68
Australia, like the UK,
69
has a concept of
authorisation, which was used in the case of
U
ni
versal Mus
i
c Austral
i
a v Sharma
n
L
i
ce
n
se
Hold
in
gs.
70
Notwithstanding some similarities between UK and Australian law, the outcome
of similar lawsuits in UK courts is uncertain. Accordingly, the Re
v
iew is not making specific
legislati
v
e recommendations this area, but this may need to be re
v
iewed sometime in the
future if other measures, as discussed below, do not work satisfactorily.
102
The Gowers Review
Source: BigChampagne, MusicAlly
Chart 5.5: Monthly average simultaneous P2P users globally
0
2
4
6
8
10
Million users
12
May
-06
Apr-06
Mar-06
Feb-06
Jan-06
Dec-05
Nov-05
Oct-05
Sep-05
Aug-05
Jul-05
Jun-05
May
-05
Apr-05
Mar-05
Feb-05
Jan-05
Dec-04
Nov-04
Oct-04
Sep-04
Aug-04
Jul-04
Jun-04
May
-04
Apr-04
Mar-04
Feb-04
Jan-04
Dec-03
Nov-03
Oct-03
Sep-03
Aug-03
Recording Industry Association of America
(RIAA) lawsuits against P2P users start here
P2P use more than
doubles in two
years
65
Section 28A of the CDPA 1988 and regulations 17 to 19 of the Electronic Commerce (EC Directive) Regulations 2002
(SI 2002/2013).
66
IP Review
, Devinsky P. and Rotstein R., Spring 2006.
67
In particular Article 5(1) of Directive 2001/29/EC and Articles 12 to 14 of Directive 2000/31/EC (E-Commerce
Directive).
68
125 S. Ct. 2764 (2005).
69
Section 16(2) of the CDPA 1988.
70
FCA 1242 [2005].
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.98
ISPs ha
v
e generally been cooperati
v
e in attempts to reduce large scale P2P use
through their networks by pro
v
iding details of large scale infringers. Howe
v
er, ISPs, as data
processors, ha
v
e obligations under the Data Protection Act
1
988, which limit the extent to
which they can disclose data on P2P copyright infringers without court orders.
5.99
The ISP Association is currently undertaking work to encourage ISPs and rights
owners to collaborate. One part of this work is the de
v
elopment of a Best Common Practice
(BCP) documemt that might enable ISPs to engage rights holders in a co-ordinated and
regularised fashion. This could operate in a similar way to the BCP for ISPs relating to the use
of the Regulation of In
v
estigatory Powers Act (RIPA) by law enforcement agencies.
5.100
The adoption of such a practice is likely to change public attitudes and beha
v
iours as
users gradually become aware of the procedures in place for remo
v
al from an ISP. BCP should
assist rights holders by pro
v
iding a procedure through which automatic action in courts will be
a
v
oided and would allow greater scrutiny on the actions of users. BCP is an ideal way to proceed
if an agreement can be brokered between the ISPs and the copyright owners and would respect
safe harbour pro
v
isions for ISPs which were set up in good faith. If there is a failure to agree, the
Go
v
ernment should look towards establishing an appropriate statutory protocol.
5.101
Car boot sales and markets are also a major source of counterfeit and pirated goods.
A 2005 report co-funded by the Go
v
ernment and industry into consumer usage and attitudes
towards counterfeits and fakes re
v
ealed that roughly 25 per cent of all counterfeit purchases
take place in markets, including street markets and car boot sales.
7
1
In order to address the
issue, the Re
v
iew recommends that there should be greater regulation of occasional sales.
P u r s u i t o f i n f r i n g e r s b y t h e r e l e v a n t a u t h o r i t i e s
5.102
The National IP Crime Strategy is a partnership between Go
v
ernment Departments,
industry and enforcement agencies, set up to determine policy on enforcing IP rights. It brings
together many different organisations including Trading Standards, the Patent Office, the
Police and Her Majestyâs Re
v
enue and Customs (HMRC). Responsibility for its de
v
elopment
sits with the PO, which works with
1
2 regional groups of Trading Standards offices. The PO has
de
v
eloped a central IP crime intelligence database, TellPat, to bring together information on
IP crime and the criminals in
v
ol
v
ed from industry and enforcement agencies.
5.103
The first operation carried out under the strategy was a series of raids at Wembley
Market in late 2005. Brent & Harrow Trading Standards led the operation with the
in
v
ol
v
ement of the Police, the Immigration Ser
v
ice and Job Centre Plus. It resulted in the
seizure of more than ÂŁ
1
.5 million of counterfeited and pirated goods and the prosecution of
34 people for trading in counterfeit goods.
72
The Review
supports the
National IP crime
strategy
Markets can be
sources for
counterfeit goods
Collaboration
between ISPs and
Creative
Industries
103
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 39:
Observe the industry agreement of protocols for sharing data
between ISPs and rights holders to remove and disbar users engaged in âpiracyâ. If this has
not proved operationally successful by the end of 2007, Government should consider
whether to legislate.
Recommendation 40:
DTI should consult on measures to tighten regulation of
occasional sales and markets by 2007.
71
Fake Nation,
Intellectual Property Theft and Organised Crime Research Project, 2005.
72
National Intellectual Property (IP) Enforcement Report,
Patent Office, 2005 accessed at
http://www.patent.gov.uk/enforcereport2005.pdf.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.104
The Re
v
iew supports the coordinated approach to IP crime that the strategy
represents. There are some areas, howe
v
er, where the current IP crime strategy could be
impro
v
ed. The initial work has been done to bring together the rele
v
ant bodies, but further
work now needs to be done to achie
v
e the desired results.
5.105
The graph below shows legitimate and illegitimate trade into the UK broken down by
means of transport. Goods entering
v
ia ports account for a larger proportion of trade than of
seizures. Furthermore, UK port seizures are lower in the UK than many other countries
including Germany, Italy and Ireland. The Re
v
iew encourages HMRC to play a full and acti
v
e
role to increase sharing of data and monitoring acti
v
ities at ports.
5.106
The Serious Organised Crime Agency (SOCA) recognises IP crime as being linked to
organised criminal acti
v
ity, and de
v
otes resources to impro
v
ing the intelligence base
necessary to take action. Howe
v
er, national policing plans do not presently recognise IP
crime as a Police priority as part of broader action against organised crime. It is important to
recognise publicly the work that the Police are doing in this area, and therefore, IP crime
should be acknowledged as an area for action by the Police as part of the work to tackle
organised crime.
5.107
The National IP Crime Strategy should also be closely harmonised with enforcement
across the EU to help to reduce counterfeit goods entering Europe. In
v
ol
v
ement in
international initiati
v
es outside Europe is also required. The Patent Office has been working
with the USA, China and EU accession states to impro
v
e enforcement and reduce the flow of
counterfeit goods. This work could be extended to encourage other countries to reduce le
v
els
of IP infringement.
104
The Gowers Review
Source: EU data, 2004; HMRC data, 2006.
Chart 5.6: Origin of legal and illegal goods into the UK by
means of transport
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Legitimate trade
Cases examined
Air
Road
Sea
Per cent
Recommendation 41:
The Home Office should recognise IP crime as an area for Police
action as a component of organised crime within the updated National Community Safety
Plan.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
R o l e f o r Tr a d i n g S t a n d a r d s
5.108
Copyright and trade mark owners ha
v
e full access to ci
v
il and criminal pro
v
isions to
enforce their rights and distinction should be made between these pro
v
isions. Where crimes
are more difficult to detect and in
v
ol
v
e organised crime, rights holders will require greater
in
v
ol
v
ement of Trading Standards and the police to enforce rights, and infringements should
be dealt with using criminal penalties.
5.109
Trading Standards ensure that trade is fair and lawful. Unlawful trade of pirated goods
generally in
v
ol
v
es infringement of either copyright, trade marks or both.
5.110
When the maximum penalty for certain copyright offences was increased in 2002
73
copyright offences became âserious arrestable offencesâ.
74
Trading Standards ha
v
e powers and
the duty to pre
v
ent the sale of trade mark protected goods. Howe
v
er, where the infringement
of rights relates to copyright alone Trading Standards do not ha
v
e the power to act, and
cannot perform searches and seizures. This means, for example, that where there are sales of
counterfeit CDs and D
V
Ds, Trading Standards ha
v
e only a limited response. This creates an
inconsistency in the way that the law treats piracy and counterfeiting.
5.111
This inconsistency would be rectified by bringing into force section
1
07A of the
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act (CDPA)
1
988
75
which would make enforcement of
copyright infringement the responsibility of Trading Standards. It would also gi
v
e Trading
Standards the power to make test purchases, enter premises and inspect and seize goods and
documents. To offset the cost of enforcement, full use should be made of the powers within
the Proceeds of Crime Act (2002).
76
5.112
The OFT is taking on the role of championing Trading Standards and helping to
define meaningful priorities for local authority Trading Standards Ser
v
ices (TSS). IP crime not
only affects legitimate local businesses but can ha
v
e a detrimental effect on consumers, since
counterfeit products may be of substandard quality and e
v
en in some cases lead to safety
concerns. It is therefore recommended that TSS take full acccount of IP crime-related issues
in setting their local priorities. The OFT and the Patent Office are working closely together to
introduce better targeted enforcement through more widespread usage of the National
Intelligence Model (NIM) by local authority Trading Standards Ser
v
ices.
Trading
Standards
105
The Gowers Review
73
By the Copyright, etc and Trade Marks (Offences and Enforcement) Act 2002.
74
Under the Police and Criminal Evidence Act 1984.
75
This provision was inserted by the Copyright, etc and Trade Marks (Offences and Enforcement) Act 2002 but has never
been brought into force.
76
POCA was set up to reduce crime by confiscating the proceeds of crime with a new power of civil recovery. The Assets
Recovery Agency was granted powers under the act to take the profits from crime through civil recovery, criminal
confiscation or taxation.
Recommendation 42:
Give Trading Standards the power to enforce copyright
infringement by enacting section 107A of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
M e c h a n i s m s t o r e s o l v e c o n f l i c t
5.113
Litigation of patents is extremely expensi
v
e in England and Wales with costs of
comparable cases in English patent courts up to four times greater than in Germany, as
shown in Table 5.4 below. Professional fees in England and Wales are generally higher and the
patent proceedings more complex. This leads to lengthier cases and higher costs. This can
make it more difficult for SMEs to enforce (or defend) any infringement claim. Chapter 6 will
consider how the current England and Wales court structure can be impro
v
ed to reduce costs.
Table 5.4: A comparison of costs in selected European courts
England and Wales
Germany
France
Netherlands
High Court: ÂŁ1m
ÂŁ37â74,000 first
ÂŁ44â74,000
ÂŁ15â30,000 (summary
instance (depends on
proceedings), ÂŁ60,000
scale fees)
simple action
Source: The Enforcement of Patent Rights, IPAC, 2003.
Note:
âŹ
converted to ÂŁ at exchange rate 1:1.48.
5.114
Alongside reforming the courts in England and Wales, the number of cases reaching
litigation should be reduced by alternati
v
e methods to resol
v
e disputes.
77
Alternati
v
e dispute
resolution (ADR) can be defined as: â... any type of procedure or combination of procedures
v
oluntarily used to resol
v
e issues in contro
v
ersy. ADRs include, but are not limited to,
conciliation, facilitation, mediation, early neutral e
v
aluation, adjudication, arbitration and
the use of ombudsmen.â It is intended as a low cost alternati
v
e to litigation.
5.115
ADRs can help to a
v
oid the negati
v
e aspects of conflict such as damage to reputation,
lost customers, and damage to company morale as well as the large cost implications.
5.116
Mediation in
v
ol
v
es a controlled discussion between two opposing parties. A neutral
person assists the two parties in working towards a negotiated agreement. The opposing
parties are in ultimate control of the decision to settle and the terms of resolution. Mediation
is more flexible than litigation in that a broad range of terms can be agreed outside the
limitations of law. It can help preser
v
e positi
v
e relations between parties that could be broken
down by mo
v
ing to litigation. Mediation is also much cheaper than litigation; costs in the UK
for mediation cases in general are around ÂŁ3,000. A high proportion of cases referred to
mediation result in settlement.
78
5.117
Mediationâs usefulness depends, howe
v
er, upon the circumstances of the dispute, the
partiesâ objecti
v
es, the engagement of the parties and the mediator. Both parties ha
v
e to agree
to, and adhere to, the decision, taking responsibility for the decision instead of passing
responsibility to a judge or arbitrator.
ADR, including
mediation, can
be used to avoid
litigation
IP litigation in
England and
Wales is
extremely
expensive
106
The Gowers Review
77
The number of cases reaching court at the moment in the UK is already fairly low, mainly due to the high costs causing
parties to settle rather than reaching trial.
78
The Centre for Effective Dispute Resolution state that over 70% cases referred to them are successfully settled.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.118
The Patent Office has recently started a mediation ser
v
ice. Se
v
eral Patent Office staff
members ha
v
e been trained in mediation and the Patent Office also pro
v
ides a
v
enue and
administrati
v
e support. This ser
v
ice has not been widely used by mediating parties. The
World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) also has ADR procedures of mediation and
arbitration where the majority of mediation cases are successfully settled.
5.119
Arbitration is not as common as mediation. It in
v
ol
v
es an appointed arbitrator whose
decision is binding and enforceable. There are no on-going court fees so arbitration is also
much cheaper than litigation. Arbitration is often used as an alternati
v
e to court when
confidentiality is important.
5.120
Different ADR procedures are suited to different client objecti
v
es as shown in the
table below. Mediation is of particular
v
alue where contracts between the two parties already
exist, as it can maintain good working relationships.
Table 5.5: A comparison of the suitability of mediation, arbitration and
court proceedings depending on the client objective
Non-binding
Binding
Objective
Mediation
Arbitration
Court
Minimise cost
3
1
0
Rapid decision
3
1
0
Non-public decision
3
1
0
Maintain/improve relationship
3
1
0
Vindication
0
2
3
Obtain neutral opinion
0
3
3
Set precedent
0
2
3
Maximise/minimise recovery
0
2
3
Source: âMediation Principles and Practiceâ, Kimberlee K. Kovach, 2004.
Key: 0 = fails to meet objective, 3 = fully meets objective
5.121
Mediation and other ADR are currently poorly used and understood for IP. DCA has
been promoting the use of ADR for se
v
eral years. Howe
v
er, some judges ha
v
e been reluctant to
encourage parties to mediate. Large companies are often unwilling to mediate in case they are
seen as âweakâ. Practice Directions, which relate to the practice and procedure of the court, can
be altered to encourage mediation.
5.122
Under the Human Rights Act
1
998, a person has a right to access to the courts. The
Re
v
iew has therefore rejected imposing further incenti
v
es to mediate such as introducing
mandatory mediation.
5.123
IP cases rarely come before magistrates and can raise no
v
el points of law. Owing to
the complexities of IP law, and the increasing sophistication of the defence pro
v
ided by IP
infringers, judges and magistrates should ha
v
e a good understanding of all aspects of IP law.
Therefore, greater training specifically dedicated to this area would be beneficial.
107
The Gowers Review
79
Rule 1.4.(2)(e) of the Civil Procedure Rules requires the court to use active case management to âencourage[e] the
parties to use an alternative dispute resolution (GL) procedure if the court considers that appropriate and facilitate[e]
the use of such procedure.â
Recommendation 43:
Strengthen Practice Directions, to provide greater
encouragement for parties to mediate,
79
in particular this should raise the profile of
mediation with judges.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
R e f o r m o f E u r o p e a n l i t i g a t i o n
5.124
Patents that are granted through the EPO e
v
entually lead to a bundle of national
patents. This can raise the costs associated with litigation and can lead to inconsistency
between national judgments. One solution that has been put forward is the European Patent
Litigation Agreement (EPLA). The EPLA would establish a single European Patent Court with
jurisdiction o
v
er patents in all the states contracting to the European Patent Con
v
ention.
5.125
It should be noted that the EPO processes in the region of
1
80,000 patent applications
e
v
ery year of which around half are granted. Howe
v
er, across the EU there are fewer than
1
,500 cases of patent infringement before the courts. Of these, somewhere between 75 and
1
50 in
v
ol
v
e more than one jurisdiction.
80
One reason for this low number of parallel cases in
the prohibiti
v
e costs of litigation in contracting states.
5.126
As the chart below shows, the estimated costs of litigation at a potential European
Patents Court could be considerably cheaper than pursuing a case in the UK at present. This
pro
v
ides a strong endorsement for the EPLA and the European Court from the UK
perspecti
v
e.
5.127
Howe
v
er, as well of being of benefit to litigants in the British courts, once parallel
litigation is taken into consideration, the European Court also becomes cheaper than parallel
litigation in three states.
8
1
As the chart below shows it would be cheaper to litigate at the
European Court than in parallel in Germany, France and the Netherlands.
Multiple
litigation in
Europe is
expensive
108
The Gowers Review
Recommendation 44:
The Patent Office should consult with the Judicial Studies Board
to determine the extent to which the complexity of IP law may give rise to a training need
for judges and magistrates and their legal advisers.
Source: Assessment of the impact of the European Patent Litigation Agreement (EPLA) on litigation of European patents, EPO, 2006.
Chart 5.7: Estimated (a) minimum and (b) maximum costs at the
court of first instance for patent cases in selected
European states, and in a potential European Court
0
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
100,000
120,000
140,000
160,000
EP Court
NL
GB
FR
DE
0
200,000
400,000
600,000
800,000
1,000,000
1,200,000
1,400,000
1,600,000
EP Court
NL
GB
FR
DE
(a)
(b)
Court costs:
âŹ
uro
Court costs:
âŹ
uro
80
Access at http://www.channelregister.co.uk/2006/09/29/legitimate_doucts.
81
Assessment of the impact of the European Patent Litigation Agreement (EPLA) on litigation of European patents,
EPO, 2006.
O
P E R AT I O N S
5
5.128
Moreo
v
er, in addition to reduced costs, a single European Court will considerably
reduce the amount of time taken to litigate as there will only be one judgment rather than
multiple decisions. This will also lead to far greater certainty of outcomes as opposing
decisions would not be reached in different jurisdictions. Pro
v
ided it is staffed by expert IP
judges, the Court will ensure that high quality decisions are taken.
5.129
Historically, the European Commission has been sceptical of the EPLA,
v
iewing it as
an unwelcome distraction from the ultimate goal of COMPAT. Howe
v
er, this position seems
to be shifting in a welcome direction. Responding to the consultation on the future of patent
policy in Europe, Commissioner McCree
v
y said: âCOMPAT and the EPLA are not mutually
exclusi
v
e initiati
v
es. They are both aiming at the same goal: a better, cheaper, more reliable
patent system.â
82
C o n c l u s i o n
5.130
The recommendations in this chapter are aimed at impro
v
ing the operations of the IP
system in terms of how IP is awarded, used and enforced. The implementation of these
recommendations alongside those from the Instruments and Go
v
ernance chapters will
address some key problems in the UK IP system.
109
The Gowers Review
0
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
100,000
120,000
140,000
EP Court
DE/F/NL
DE/GB/NL
0
100,000
200,000
300,000
400,000
500,000
600,000
700,000
800,000
EP Court
DE/F/NL
DE/GB/NL
Chart 5.8: Estimated (a) minimum and (b) maximum costs at the
court of first instance for parallel litigation in selected European
states, and in a potential European Court
(a)
(b)
Source: Assessment of the impact of the European Patent Litigation Agreement (EPLA) on litigation of European patents, EPO (2006).
Court costs:
âŹ
uro
Court costs:
âŹ
uro
82
IP Rights â next steps,
McCreevy C, 2006. See http://europa.eu.int/rapid/pressReleasesAction.do?reference=
SPEECH/06/485&format=HTML&aged=0&language=EN&guiLanguage=en.
Recommendation 45:
Support the establishment of a single EU court to adjudicate
cross-border IP disputes by promoting the European Patent Litigation Agreement.
110
The Gowers Review
6
G
O V E R N A N C E
The Gowers Review
6.1
It is
v
ital that the organisations responsible for administering, enforcing and setting
policy for IP are well run and effecti
v
ely integrated. Without adequately functioning bodies,
the IP system will not operate in the way users expect. As noted in Chapter 4 there are a
number of international fora and bodies engaged in IP policy making and operation. The
Re
v
iew focuses on the principal UK body with responsibility for IP: the UK Patent Office.
T H E U K PAT E N T O F F I C E
6.2
The UK Patent Office has a range of responsibilities in relation to IP, as outlined in
Chapter 3. This chapter focuses on three areas:
â˘
policy formulation;
â˘
administration of registered IP rights (patents, designs and trade marks); and
â˘
dispute resolution as a tribunal.
6.3
Chapter 5 addressed the Patent Officeâs role leading the IP crime strategy, and its work
pro
v
iding information to business.
Pa t e n t O f f i c e p o l i c y r o l e
6.4
The Patent Office is responsible for ad
v
ising Ministers on the
v
ast majority of IP
policy.
1
It reports to the Minister of State for Science and Inno
v
ation in the Department of
Trade and Industry (DTI). The Re
v
iew has identified three principal concerns in relation to
policy formulation at the Patent Office:
â˘
policy de
v
elopment has often been reacti
v
e and has not taken into account
changes in the economy and rele
v
ant de
v
elopments in related policy areas;
â˘
there is no clear separation between operational and policy functions in the
Patent Office, leading to a potential conflict of interest; and
â˘
it has pro
v
en difficult to grow policy skills in the Patent Office.
6.5
Responsibility for policy de
v
elopment in the Patent Office rests with the Intellectual
Property and Inno
v
ation Directorate (IPID). IPID has a clear understanding of detailed IP
issues, and can play a strong representational role on specific policy areas. For example,
UKPO ensured that UK business interests were represented in European discussions to
amend the Community Trade Mark Regulations in 2005. It also successfully implemented the
European Directi
v
e concerning remuneration for artists when their works are re-sold,
recei
v
ing a commendation from the Da
v
idson Re
v
iew of the Implementation of European
Directi
v
es for its work in this area.
Policy has been
reactive
111
1
Plant breeders rights and protection of geographic indicators and related rights fall within the scope of the Department
for the Environment, Food, and Rural Affairs.
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
6.6
Howe
v
er, the Patent Office has been less effecti
v
e at taking a strategic
v
iew of IP
policy. The Patent Office has not always been effecti
v
e at linking IP and other, related areas,
such as, trade, health and broader inno
v
ation policy. For example, it has not undertaken
systematic work examining how the IP framework has helped or hindered the de
v
elopment
of Open Source methods,
2
or proteomics, a subset of genetic science.
6.7
The Patent Office has a Steering Board and an Executi
v
e Board. The Steering Boardâs
role is to ad
v
ise Ministers on the corporate plan and performance. The Executi
v
e Boardâs role
is to o
v
ersee the day-to-day running of the Patent Office. Both boards focus on the
operational performance of the Office, and neither ha
v
e detailed o
v
ersight of the Patent
Officeâs policy function.
6.8
In order to add strategic focus to policy de
v
elopment the DTI established the
Intellectual Property Ad
v
isory Committee (IPAC) in 200
1
. It was charged with identifying
strategic issues for IP policy and relaying stakeholder
v
iews to Go
v
ernment. IPAC has drawn
attention to some of the challenges for IP policy, including the lack of awareness of IP among
businesses, particularly SMEs. Howe
v
er, in many areas of policy, IPACâs in
v
estigations ha
v
e
been protracted and, in a number of instances, it has failed to produce substanti
v
e outputs.
IPAC has failed to add substanti
v
ely to policy de
v
elopment because it has had an
insufficiently clear remit, been inadequately resourced, and its membership drawn from too
narrow a group of stakeholders.
6.9
The Re
v
iew belie
v
es that a strong, independent body could make a real contribution
to IP policy de
v
elopment. An independent board should be gi
v
en a clear and coherent remit
to pro
v
ide a strategic o
v
er
v
iew of policy and to challenge Go
v
ernment policy-making. In
addition, it should ad
v
ise on how the UKâs interests should be pursued in international IP
negotiations. The chair should be operationally independent from Go
v
ernment and be
appointed by the Chancellor. The board should be drawn from a wide range of stakeholders,
including academics, consumer groups and industry representati
v
es â from creati
v
e
industries and âindustrialâ IP users â who are able to draw links between IP and a number of
related issues. In addition to independent stakeholders, the head of IPID at the Patent Office
and a senior official from the DTI and HM Treasury should sit on the board. The board should
be free to set out the acti
v
ities it undertakes and the policy areas it in
v
estigates. Go
v
ernment
should respond to the ad
v
ice of the board, but should not be bound by its direction or
decisions.
6.10
One of the factors that hindered IPAC from making an impressi
v
e contribution to
policy, was inadequate resource. The independent policy ad
v
isory board should be gi
v
en a
standing secretariat based in London. Staff should be drawn from the OSI in the DTI, and the
chair should ha
v
e the ability to bring in external experts to assist the secretariat where
necessary.
Recommendation 46:
Establish a new Strategic Advisory Board for IP policy (SABIP),
covering the full range of IP rights, reporting to the minister responsible, by 2007. The
Board should be drawn from a wide range of external experts as well as key senior policy
officials from relevant government departments, and should be based in London. ÂŁ150,000
should be allocated to fund the secretariat by the Patent Office.
Adequate
resourcing
Reforms to date
have not been
successful
112
The Gowers Review
2
Open Source software can be freely used and improved upon by programmers, provided that any improvements to the
source code are made available to subsequent users.
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
6.11
In addition to the standing secretariat, the Re
v
iew belie
v
es that the work of SABIP
would be enhanced if it could commission external research. The Japanese Patent Office sets
aside a significant amount of money each year for research into IP-related policy issues. This
is used by their Institute of Intellectual Property and has produced a wide range of policy
reports analysing the changing en
v
ironment for IP. It is a key part of Japanâs strategic
approach to Intellectual Property. Similarly, US proposals to sol
v
e the problem of orphan
works were de
v
eloped using research funded by the Library of Congress. Funds set aside in
the UK could be used to commission independent and forward looking research to
supplement the standing secretariat.
6.12
In addition to pro
v
iding a strong independent board to impro
v
e strategic policy
making, the Re
v
iew belie
v
es that the Patent Officeâs internal policy making function should be
strengthened to pro
v
ide a stronger strategic focus and link more effecti
v
ely with wider themes
and other Go
v
ernment objecti
v
es.
6.13
The Patent Officeâs policy function is not clearly distinct from its operational work.
While IPID is nominally the lead on policy de
v
elopment, the CEO, the Patents Directorate, the
Trade Marks and Designs Directorate and the Finance Directorate all undertake additional
policy analysis and pro
v
ide ad
v
ice. This creates a potential conflict of interest. The optimal
policy for the Patent Office, functioning as a Trading Fund, may not be the optimal policy for
Go
v
ernment, particularly in international negotiations. For instance, national offices may not
want international rights to be cheaper to register than national rights, as this would reduce
demand for their ser
v
ices. In order to remo
v
e the potential for conflicts of interest, a clear
distinction between policy and operational functions is necessary. The policy directorate
should take the lead on issues of policy, including at the European Patent Office (EPO), Office
of Harmonisation for the Internal Market (OHIM) and World Intellectual Property
Organization (WIPO), with support from operational colleagues as necessary. It is important
that policy officials report through a different management structure to their operational
colleagues, and that IP policy takes full account of wider Go
v
ernment objecti
v
es.
6.14
The Patent Office is located in Newport in South Wales. Since mo
v
ing to Wales the
Patent Office has reduced running costs by more than ten per cent. Staff turno
v
er has also
reduced. Howe
v
er, this physical separation of Patent Office staff from central Go
v
ernment
departments has contributed to the lack of connecti
v
ity with wider Go
v
ernment agendas and
has made it more difficult to grow policy skills in the Patent Office. The Re
v
iew recognises the
benefits of ha
v
ing certain Go
v
ernment functions located outside London and the South East,
but belie
v
es that policy making would be strengthened if staff added to their experience in the
Patent Office by working in central Go
v
ernment departments.
6.15
Patent Office staff sometimes lack an understanding of how businesses use IP and
the problems they face negotiating the existing system. A greater understanding of how IP
policy impacts on all stakeholders across industry, NGOs and consumers would ensure that
Ministers were more fully appraised of the potential impacts of a policy under
consideration.
Recommendation 48:
Patent Office should introduce a clear split of responsibility
between delivery and policy directorates.
Strengthening
Patent Office
policy making
Recommendation 47:
The Patent Office should provide an annual IP strategic analysis
fund of ÂŁ500,000 managed by the policy advisory board in consultation with the IP Policy
Directorate.
113
The Gowers Review
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
Pa t e n t O f f i c e a d m i n i s t r a t i v e r o l e â g r a n t i n g I P r i g h t s
6.16
Many submissions to the call for e
v
idence were positi
v
e about the ser
v
ice pro
v
ided by
the Patent Office to applicants. Patent Office customer sur
v
eys also suggest stakeholder
satisfaction. Patent grant fees in the UK are low. As Chart 6.
1
below shows, the UK is one of
the cheapest countries to ha
v
e a patent in force for twenty years.
6.17
The Re
v
iew recognises that office fees are only a small part of the o
v
erall pre-grant
fees borne by applicants, and has made recommendations in Chapter 5 to reduce legal costs,
which make up the bulk of the costs.
6.18
The Patent Office is an executi
v
e agency of the DTI, and operates as a Trading Fund
under the Patent Office Trading Fund Order. This means that it must use its own re
v
enue
sources to co
v
er operating costs and pro
v
ide a return on capital to the Go
v
ernment. A
separate order sets out the acti
v
ities that can be taken into account when setting statutory
fees to allow cross-subsidy between different functions.
6.19
The Patent Office trade mark and design operations generally break e
v
en and pro
v
ide
a return on capital employed. Howe
v
er, at present, patent operations do not. The Patent Office
charges small initial fees at the patent grant stage. It recoups costs principally
v
ia renewal fees.
UK renewal fees are payable each year from the first year after being granted. Currently the
break-e
v
en point on domestically granted patents at the UK Patent Office is fourteen years.
A UK patent that expires before this period effecti
v
ely has its registration and administration
costs subsidised by the Patent Office. The current a
v
erage life for a UK patent is between ten
and ele
v
en years. Consequently, domestic patents operations do not co
v
er their costs.
UK patents do
not cover their
costs
UK patents are
cheap to acquire
Recommendation 49:
Encourage IP policy officials to obtain policy experience outside
the IP Policy Branch, and support short industry placement schemes for policy staff.
114
The Gowers Review
Source: Patent Office data.
EPO estimate based on renewal in six countries, after fifth year.
Chart 6.1: Cost difference to the UK for a 20-year patent,
2006
-ÂŁ5,000
ÂŁ0
ÂŁ5,000
ÂŁ10,000
ÂŁ15,000
ÂŁ20,000
ÂŁ25,000
Russia
India
Canada
Switzerland
Ireland
Sweden
Australia
France
Brazil
Denmark
Finland
USA
China
Germany
Japan
South Korea
EPO
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
6.20
Domestic patents are currently subsidised by European patents designating in the
UK. The Patent Office currently retains half of the renewal fees from European patents
designating the UK. Howe
v
er, the EPO Administrati
v
e Council could change this di
v
ision at
any time and as such, this stream of re
v
enue is unpredictable.
6.21
Patent Office income is used to fund policy, awareness, and enforcement, and the
Patent Officeâs tribunal functions. It is important that the use and allocation of such resources
for both its statutory and non-statutory work is clear and transparent.
6.22
The position of the Patent Office as both a granting authority for IP rights and as a
tribunal where those rights may be challenged creates a potential conflict of interest. Officials
in the tribunal may be reluctant to o
v
er-rule the decisions made by their colleagues in
granting rights.
N a m e o f t h e Pa t e n t O f f i c e
6.23
The name of the Patent Office can be misleading to stakeholders. It suggests that the
office is only concerned with patents while, in fact, it performs a broad range of functions in
relation to all IP. The present name also contributes to the perception that other forms of IP,
for example copyright, take a lower priority.
6.24
Some stakeholders ha
v
e suggested that a separate Copyright Office be established.
Howe
v
er, the Re
v
iew belie
v
es that there are a greater number of synergies than differences
across different forms of IP. Policy, education, enforcement, business support, and awareness
raising cut across the boundaries of all IP rights. The Re
v
iew has therefore decided not to
recommend that a separate Copyright Office be established.
6.25
Instead, the Patent Office should ensure that all stakeholders are gi
v
en, and are seen
to be gi
v
en, equal consideration in IP policy. The Re
v
iew therefore recommends that the
name of the Patent Office should change to reflect better the functions it carries out.
C O S T A N D C O M P L E X I T Y O F L I T I G AT I O N
6.26
As outlined in Chapter 2, the current UK IP litigation structure is complex, with
litigants ha
v
ing a choice of tribunals through which to commence their action. While ha
v
ing
a number of judicial fora enables litigants to choose the most cost effecti
v
e or appropriate
tribunal or court, it can add to complexity. The diagram below summarises the current court
and tribunal structure together with appeal routes.
Recommendation 53:
Change the name of the UK Patent Office to the UK Intellectual
Property Office (UKâIPO) to reflect the breadth of functions the office has, and to dispel
confusion.
Recommendation 52:
Ensure that under current arrangements in the Patent Office,
there is a clear internal separation of responsibility between the granting of rights and
disputes over their ownership or validity. This should be achieved by clearly separating the
line management structures.
Recommendation 51:
Increase the transparency of Patent Office financial reporting.
Recommendation 50:
Realign UK Patent Office administrative fees to cover costs more
closely on Patent Office administrative operations (e.g. granting patents).
115
The Gowers Review
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
6.27
As discussed in Chapter 5 IP litigation is expensi
v
e in the UK relati
v
e to other
countries. Claims in English and Welsh courts can be up to four times more expensi
v
e than in
Germany, yet there are few differences compared to Europe in the remedies a
v
ailable or the
quality of legal decisions. There are a number of reasons why lawsuits in England and Wales
are costlier than throughout Europe. Professional fees in England and Wales are generally
higher and the patent litigation process is more complex, in
v
ol
v
ing disclosure, cross-
examination and the use of expert witnesses. Other jurisdictions in Europe make less use of
these processes and also ha
v
e systems of capped or scale costs. This reduces risk and gi
v
es
both parties an indication of their liability should they lose.
6.28
High costs of litigation fall particularly hea
v
ily on SMEs defending their rights. SMEs
are often dissuaded from bringing cases against larger firms, as they know that larger firms
can stretch out suits and thereby increase the cost. For SMEs, protecting their market position
is initially more important than reco
v
ery of damages: infringement needs to be stopped
quickly. The current UK appeals route is slow and so does not meet their needs.
116
The Gowers Review
Chart 6.2: Current IP litigation system
Source:Treasury analysis.
Appointed
person
High Court
(Chancery Division)
Designs,
Copyright,
Trade Marks
Patent Court
Only Patents
Patents County
Court
Not copyright
Patent Office
(Tribunal and granting)
Registered
design appeals
tribunal
Copyright
Tribunal
Court of
appeal
European Court
of Justice
House of
Lords
Appeal
route
References to
European Court of Justice
Designs
TM Route 2
Cases sent
TM
Route 1
Patents
G
O V E R N A N C E
6
R e f o r m o f Pa t e n t s C o u n t y C o u r t
6.29
The Patents County Court (PCC) was established to pro
v
ide a cheaper and more
streamlined procedure than the High Court for litigating patents and designs and recently
this has been extended to trade marks, Community Trade Marks and Community Designs.
The Patents County Court is run by the courts ser
v
ice. In most respects, the High Court and
PCC ha
v
e the same jurisdiction.
6.30
Following the Woolf reforms to the ci
v
il law system in
1
999, all courts in England and
Wales now work to the same rules of procedure. The reforms led to three âtracksâ of
legislation: small claims; fast; and multi-track. Cases are allocated largely according to the
amount in dispute. Anything o
v
er ÂŁ
1
5,000, which includes nearly all IP cases, is heard as a
multi-track case. Accordingly, many of the benefits of the fast track system, such as capped
costs, limited trial length and limited disclosure, do not apply to IP cases. This means the PCC
is now almost as expensi
v
e and complex as High Court litigation. High costs at the PCC and
the High Court act as a barrier to all potential litigants, and to SMEs in particular.
6.31
Changes to the rele
v
ant Ci
v
il Procedure Rules (CPR) could enable IP cases to be
allocated to their own âfast trackâ procedure. This would entail raising the current ÂŁ
1
5,000
limit on the amount in dispute that can be heard in fast tracked cases. In addition, legal fees
for fast track IP procedures should be capped to reduce costs.
C O N C LU S I O N
6.32
This chapter has made a number of recommendations to impro
v
e the Patent Officeâs
work in respect of policy making and administration of rights and its tribunal function. These
reforms will reduce the costs of litigation and make sure the Patent Office has a secure
financial footing. Furthermore, they will ensure that future challenges to the IP system are
adequately addressed by policy and that the UK is able to place itself at the forefront of the
knowledge economy.
Recommendation 54:
DCA should review the issues raised in relation to IP cases and
the fast track and seek views in the context of its forthcoming consultation paper, which
will consider the case track limits, and how the claims process can be made more timely,
proportionate and cost-effective. It should bring forward any proposals for change by the
end of 2007.
117
The Gowers Review
Chart 6.3: Development of the Patents County Court
Source: The Work of the Patents County Court, Michael Fysh, 2003.
1986 White Paper
All patent disputes dealt
with by Patent Office or
patents court
1988 Copyright
Designs and
Patent Act
White paper
suggestion accepted
and enacted
September 1990
Patents County
Court established
118
The Gowers Review
7
C
O N C L U S I O N
The Gowers Review
7.1
Creati
v
ity, inno
v
ation and in
v
estment are crucial to boosting the producti
v
ity of the
UK economy. Looking forward, their importance is set to remain centre-stage as we enter the
âthird industrial re
v
olutionâ. The UK must be able to harness creati
v
ity and promote
inno
v
ation in order to compete in the global, knowledge-based economy. Intellectual
Property creates the link in the chain which incenti
v
ises indi
v
iduals and firms to inno
v
ate and
create, with the confidence that their in
v
estment is protected.
7.2
The Re
v
iew has shown that while in many regards the UK IP system works well, there
are a number of areas where it could perform e
v
en better. The Re
v
iew has made a number of
recommendations to impro
v
e the framework for inno
v
ation; in particular it has called for:
â˘
stronger enforcement of IP rights to ensure practical protection is pro
v
ided for
rights owners and effecti
v
e deterrents to infringement are in place;
â˘
lower operational costs for business, simplifying processes such as licensing
and litigation, and impro
v
ing education and ad
v
ice; and
â˘
greater balance and flexibility of IP rights to allow indi
v
iduals, businesses and
institutions to use information and ideas in ways consistent with the digital
age.
7.4
The Re
v
iew has set a
v
ision for IP policy moti
v
ated by a clear purpose. The IP system
must enable greater economic producti
v
ity whilst ensuring equity for all those who use IP. In
order to achie
v
e this, the instruments of the system must be balanced, coherent and flexible,
and the operation of those instruments must be effecti
v
ely administered. Changes will be
required within the UK and abroad. In order to dri
v
e a programme of greater international
coherence, especially at the European le
v
el, the UK should take a lead on IP policy
de
v
elopment. A more efficient international IP system is not only to the benefit of the UK, but
to the whole of Europe and beyond.
7.5
If the Go
v
ernment accepts and implements the Re
v
iewâs recommendations, the
Re
v
iew belie
v
es that the portfolio of measures will ensure that the UK IP system is fit for
purpose in the digital, global age.
Meeting the
challenges
Improving the
current system
119
120
The Gowers Review
A
G
L O S S A R Y
The Gowers Review
ACID:
Anti Copying in Design
Additional damages:
Damages pro
v
ided for by the CDPA for infringements of copyright,
design rights or performerâs property rights
ADR:
Alternati
v
e Dispute Resolution
Arbitration:
A form of ADR where an impartial referee hears and determines a dispute
Berne Convention:
Berne Con
v
ention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works that
pro
v
ides certain minimum standards in relation to literary, dramatic, artistic and music
works
Biotechnology:
The use of li
v
ing organisms and tissues in the de
v
elopment and manufacture
of products
BMR:
British Music Rights
BPI:
British Phonographic Industry, the British record industryâs trade association
Business Link:
UK national business ad
v
ice ser
v
ice
Call for Evidence:
The Gowers Re
v
iew consultation, from February to April 2006
CBI:
The Confederation of British Industry, a trade association representing the interests of
UK business
CFI:
Court of First Instance
CIPA:
Chartered Institute of Patent Agents
Civil Procedure Rules (CPR):
A set of rules which go
v
ern the way in which ci
v
il court cases are
conducted in England and Wales
Claims:
The part of a patent that states the uses and possible applications of the in
v
ention
described in the patent
Combined Patent Search and Examination (CSE):
UK Patent Office initiati
v
e to combine
patent search and examination and thus reduce time to grant a patent
Community acquis:
The body of common rights and obligations which are acknowledged by
all the Member States of the European Community
Community Patent:
A patent law measure being debated within the EC which would allow an
applicant to obtain a unitary patent which would ha
v
e effect throughout the Community
Community Patent Review:
A peer re
v
iew system for patents currently being de
v
eloped at
the USPTO
Community Registered Design:
A design right that gi
v
es protection throughout the
Community, administered by OHIM
Community Trade Mark (CTM):
A trade mark that has unitary effect and gi
v
es protection
throughout the Community, administered by OHIM
121
G
L O S S A R Y
A
Companies House:
An executi
v
e agency of DTI which registers and pro
v
ides information on
all UK companies under the Companies Acts
Competition Commission:
An independent public body which conducts enquiries into
mergers, markets and the regulation of the major regulated industries
Copycat packaging:
Competitors using packaging designs for their products that mimic
closely the packaging of familiar brands
Copyright:
A set of exclusi
v
e rights granted by the CDPA, which last for a limited time to
protect the particular form, way or manner in which an idea or information is expressed.
Copyright arises automatically in the UK
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act (CDPA) 1988:
An Act which go
v
erns UK copyright laws,
created an unregistered design right and contained modifications to the law on patents and
registered designs
Copyright Tribunal:
An independent body set up under the CDPA to settle
v
arious types of
copyright disputes, mainly in relation to copyright licensing. The UK Patent Office pro
v
ides a
secretariat to the Tribunal
Copyright (Visually Impaired Persons) Act 2002:
An act which amended the CDPA
1
988 and
introduced exceptions to copyright law that remo
v
e the need to obtain permission from the
rights holder of a copyright protected work in order to produce an âaccessible copyâ for those
with
v
isual impairment
Counterfeit:
An imitation of a good made to represent the original, which is not authorised by
the rights owner
Creative Commons:
A non-profit organisation which offers a set of copyright licences to
promote freedom of use and reuse of creati
v
e works
DCA:
Department for Constitutional Affairs
DCMS:
Department for Culture, Media and Sport
DfES:
Department for Education and Skills
DRM:
Digital Rights Management, technology used by content owners to control the use of
their work
DTI:
Department of Trade and Industry
EC:
European Community
ECJ:
European Court of Justice
Educational Exceptions:
Certain exceptions to copyright which allow works to be used for a
range of non-commercial educational purposes
EPC:
European Patent Con
v
ention, a treaty which created the European Patent Organisation
and sets the rules of the European patent
EPLA:
European Patent Litigation Agreement, a proposed single European patent judicial
system
EPO:
European Patent Office, the executi
v
e body of the European Patent Organisation
122
The Gowers Review
G
L O S S A R Y
A
EPOrg:
European Patent Organisation, an international organisation set up by the EPC which
pro
v
ides a centralised patent grant system administered by the EPO
Esp@cenet:
A patent search ser
v
ice de
v
eloped by the EPO
EU:
European Union
Executive Agency:
An organisation which carries out some executi
v
e functions of UK
go
v
ernment. Do not generally set policy but ha
v
e flexibility in managing the implementation
of policy
Fair dealing:
A series of copyright exceptions which permit a work to be used for limited
purposes, pro
v
ided the use is âfairâ
Fair use:
Exceptions to US copyright law which allow limited use of copyright material
without requiring permission from the rights holders
FDI:
Foreign Direct In
v
estment, in
v
estment in one country by firms owned in another
country
Free riding:
When one person benefits from the actions and efforts of another without paying
for or sharing the costs
GDP:
Gross Domestic Product, the total
v
alue of goods and ser
v
ices produced by a nation
Get-up:
V
isual appearance of a product that may require protection as part of the total image
or o
v
erall impression created by the product or its packaging in the marketplace
GNP:
Gross National Product, the
v
alue of a countryâs final output of goods and ser
v
ices in a
year
Gross Value Added:
The difference between output and intermediate consumption for a gi
v
en
sector or industry
High Court:
In England and Wales, the High Court hears the most important ci
v
il cases and
appeals from the County Courts
IFPI:
International Federation of the Phonographic Industry
Industrial application:
In order to recei
v
e patent protection, an in
v
ention must be capable of
being made or used in some kind of industry
Information Society Directive (âInfoSocâ):
Directi
v
e 200
1
/29/EC on the harmonisation of
certain aspects of copyright and related rights in the information society
Intangible assets:
Items of
v
alue owned by a firm or indi
v
idual without a physical existence,
such as goodwill and the
v
alue of patents
Inventive Step:
The concept that an in
v
ention is not an ob
v
ious de
v
elopment on what has
been done or published before the priority date
IPAC:
Intellectual Property Ad
v
isory Committee, a body formed to gi
v
e independent ad
v
ice to
Go
v
ernment on IP issues
IPID:
Intellectual Property and Inno
v
ation Directorate, the Directorate at the UK Patent
Office which deals with IP policy
ISP:
Internet ser
v
ice pro
v
ider
ITMA:
Institute of Trade Mark Agents
123
The Gowers Review
G
L O S S A R Y
A
JPO:
Japanese Patent Office
Licence of Right:
The endorsement of a patent as licence of right enables the owner to pay
half renewal fees. In return anyone may ha
v
e a licence upon reasonable terms
Licensing (in-licensing/out-licensing):
Contractual agreement granting permission to use IP
under specific conditions. âIn-licensingâ refers to licensing of anotherâs IP, âout-licensingâ
refers to licensing of oneâs own IP to others
London Agreement:
An international agreement under the EPC aimed at reducing European
patent costs by reducing the post-grant translation requirements
Madrid Protocol:
Pro
v
ides for the protection of trade marks in a number of countries by
means of a single application
MCPS:
Mechanical Copyright Protection Society, a UK collecting society
Mediation:
The negotiation between two parties to resol
v
e differences, aided by a neutral
third party
National IP Crime Strategy:
A strategy set up to tackle IP crime by bringing together different
parts of go
v
ernment, industry stakeholders, policymakers and enforcers, to create a
coordinated approach to intellectual property enforcement. Currently led by the Patent
Office
NGO:
Non-go
v
ernmental organisation
Novelty:
The concept that the claims defining an in
v
ention in a patent application must be
new for an in
v
ention to be patentable
Observations (âSection 21â):
In the UK, the ability to comment on whether the Patent Office
should grant a patent for a particular in
v
ention after it has been published
OFT:
Office of Fair Trading
OHIM:
Office for Harmonisation in the Internal Market, the recei
v
ing and examining Office
for applications for Community Trade Marks and Design rights
ONS:
Office for National Statistics
Open Source:
A program whose source code is distributed, often with copyright licensing
terms allowing others to use that source code
Orphan work:
A copyright work where the rights holder cannot be found
P2P:
Peer to peer, the sharing and deli
v
ery of files among groups of people logged on to a file
sharing network
Paris Convention:
The first treaty on industrial property rights which was originally agreed in
1
883. It pro
v
ides for national treatment, priority and some minimum standards
Passing off:
A common law claim which can be used to protect the reputation of a trade mark,
brand or get up of a product
Patent opposition:
A request to a patent office by an opposing party that an application
should be refused, or that a granted patent should be annulled; there is no patent opposition
under UK law
124
The Gowers Review
G
L O S S A R Y
A
Patent Pools:
A cooperati
v
e agreement between se
v
eral patent owners to cross-licence
patents relating to a particular technology
Patentability:
The ability of an in
v
ention to satisfy the legal requirements for obtaining a
patent, including no
v
elty, in
v
ol
v
ing an in
v
enti
v
e step (non-ob
v
iousness), ha
v
ing industrial
application and not be âexcludedâ (e.g. computer software may not be patentable in many
countries)
Patents County Court:
A court founded to cater for the needs principally of medium and
small size firms in litigating patents and designs, recently extended to trade marks
PCT:
Patents Cooperation Treaty, the treaty that facilitates filing of applications between
member countries by pro
v
iding a single international application procedure
Performers Rights:
Rights, additional to the rights of copyright owners, initially belonging to
the performer with respect to the performance and subsequent exploitation of the
performance
Piracy:
Unauthorised duplication of goods protected by IP law
PPL:
Phonographic Performance Limited, a UK collecting society
Preliminary examination:
The initial study of an application by a patent office to check that
it meets formal requirements, in particular that it is properly formatted
Prior art:
Pre
v
iously used or published technology, that may be referred to in an application
Priority date:
The initial date of filing of a patent application, normally in the applicantâs
domestic patent office. This date is used to help determine the no
v
elty of an in
v
ention
Proceeds of Crime Act (POCA):
A law which enables property obtained by unlawful conduct
to be reco
v
ered by enforcement agencies
PRS:
Performing Rights Society, a UK collecting society
Punitive Damages:
Also known as exemplary damages, are damages used to punish a
defendant for his or her wrongdoing, they are generally una
v
ailable under English law
R&D:
Research and De
v
elopment
RDA:
Regional De
v
elopment Agency, non-departmental public bodies for the de
v
elopment of
each of the UKâs regions
Registered Design:
A monopoly right granted in respect of the appearance of the whole or
part of a product
Relative Grounds (for refusal):
The decision to reject a trade mark application as it is identical
to or similar to earlier marks
Renewal fees:
Payments that must be made by the applicant to keep a registered right in force
and pre
v
ent it from lapsing
Retrospective/Retroactive term extension:
Extension of copyright term for works that are
already in copyright (retrospecti
v
e) and for works that ha
v
e fallen out of copyright, but which
would still be in copyright if the longer term existed when they were created (retroacti
v
e
re
v
i
v
al of copyright)
Reverse Engineering:
The process of understanding how a product is made from disassembly
of the product
125
The Gowers Review
G
L O S S A R Y
A
Search report:
The list of citations of published prior art documents prepared by the Patent
Office examiner in checking the no
v
elty of a patent application
SEEDA:
South East England De
v
elopment Agency
SIPO:
(State Intellectual Property Office), Chinaâs IP Office
SME:
Small and Medium-sized Enterprise
SOCA:
Serious Organised Crime Agency
Specification:
The description, drawings and claims of an in
v
ention prepared to support a
patent application
Substantive examination:
The examination by the patent office examiner of a patent
application to determine whether a patent meets the patentability criteria
Sui generis:
(âof its own kindâ) A right specifically designed to address the needs and concerns
of a particular issue
Supplementary Protection Certificate (SPC):
Additional protection equi
v
alent to an
extension of patent term which gi
v
es certain products (in particular pharmaceutical
products) longer protection due to the additional regulatory requirements
TellPat:
The National Intellectual Property Intelligence System
Term:
The number of years that a particular IP right lasts
TPM:
Technical protection measure, designed to pre
v
ent unauthorised use of copyright
protected content
Trade mark:
A distincti
v
e sign or identifier that can distinguish the goods and ser
v
ices of one
trader from those of another
Trade Mark Opposition:
After a trade mark has been published, the period of three months
during which time anyone can raise an objection to the Patent Office decision to accept the
mark
Trading Fund:
Parts of Go
v
ernment which operate in specialised fields and rely on their
ability to deri
v
e income in order to co
v
er their costs. Each is established by their own Trading
Fund Order
Transformative works:
Works that use other works protected by copyright for a purpose such
as to comment upon, criticize or parody the copyrighted work
TRIPS:
Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights Agreement, a treaty administered
by WTO which sets down minimum standards for IP regulation
UK Trade and Investment (UKTI):
Go
v
ernment organisation that supports companies in the
UK doing business internationally and o
v
erseas enterprises seeking to do business in the UK
UKPO:
United Kingdom Patent Office
Unregistered design right:
A right which comes automatically into being to protect an
original design
USPTO:
United States Patent and Trademark Office
Utility model:
A kind of patent a
v
ailable in some countries (but not the UK) which in
v
ol
v
es a
simpler in
v
enti
v
e step than that in a patent. Also known as a petty patent
126
The Gowers Review
G
L O S S A R Y
A
VPL:
V
ideo Performance Limited, a UK collecting society.
WIPO:
World Intellectual Property Organization
Woolf Reforms:
Changes to ci
v
il law procedures in England and Wales which aim to simplify
and speed up the process of taking cases through the courts
WTO:
World Trade Organization
127
The Gowers Review
128
The Gowers Review
B
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
The Gowers Review
B.1
The formal Call for E
v
idence was published on 23rd February 2006. It set out the
scope of the Re
v
iew and asked respondents to comment on a range of general and specific IP
issues, and to highlight other issues they considered important. The questions posed in the
Call for E
v
idence are set out below. The Call for E
v
idence closed on 2
1
st April 2006.
B.2
The Call for E
v
idence elicited 5
1
7 responses and a petition on extending copyright
term for sound recordings. Responses not designated as confidential can be
v
iewed on the
Gowers Re
v
iew website. The full list of respondents is below.
R E S P O N S E S : I N D I V I D UA L
129
Alan Bunting
Alan Cox
Alasdair Poore
Albert Pattison
Alexander Mckenna
Alistair Kerr
Alister Mitchell
Andrew John
Andrew John Hughes
Andrew Shuttlewood
Andy Green
Andy Turner
Anne Duffill
Anthony Austin
Anthony Barnett
Anthony Bradley
Anthony H Ratcliffe
Anthony Skyrme/Michael
Schofield
Antony Howard
Antony Watts
Ashley Karyl
Austin Powell
B F Woodgate
B J Moore
Barry McCanna
Bernard Smith
Bharath Manu Akkara
V
eetil
Bill Myatt
Brian Hawkins
Brian Matthews
Charles Harrison
Chris Bartram
Chris Brand
Chris Newton
Lord Chris Smith
Christopher Lee
Christopher Wood
Colin Charman
Cristian Miceli
D B Fletcher
D C Kendal
D M Soall
Dan Reâem
Daniel Moylan
Da
v
e Bishop
Da
v
e Glass
Da
v
e Jessop
Da
v
e McAleer
Da
v
id Ades
Da
v
id and Nansi Mottram
Da
v
id Colp
Da
v
id Cummings
Professor Da
v
id Kirkby
Lord Da
v
id Puttnam
Da
v
id Robinson
Da
v
id Symes
Derek Holt
Derek Metheringham
Don Cox
Donald Petter
Duncan Curley
Edward Barrow
Eric Smith
Fiona Frank
Frank Bristow
Frank Cullen
Frank French
Fred McCormick
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
Gary Holloway
Geoff Dann
Geoff Wallis
Geoff Wilding
Geoff Woolfe
Glenn Mitchell
Glenn Thorpe
Howard Hope
Ian Bruntlett
Ian Forbes
Ian Gillis
Dr J Pelan
J R Wrigley
James Cort
James Hogg
James Nice
Jamie Robert Thompson
Jim Marshall
John Adrian
John Booth
John Capes
John Earl
John Goslin
John Hope
John Howkins
John Walsh
Jonathan Sanders
Jonnie Dance
Jui Hsuan Tang
Julian Dyer
Julian Myerscough
Julian
V
ein
K F Harris/ A J Reid/
S J Goddard/G Goddard
Ken Caswell
Ken Sephton
Ken Strachan
Kenneth I Brown
Lee Raymond
Leonard Nicholson
Les Hurdle
Leslie Da
v
idson
Louis Barfe
Louise Pryor
Lyn Shailer
M Highton
M I
v
an
Malcolm Austen
Margaret Smith
Mark Berresford
Mark Spry
Maurice McCarthy
Mel
v
in Metcalfe
Michael Asser
Michael Martin Foreman
Michael Pointon
Michael Smith
Dr Michael Steele
Michael
v
an Boolen
Michelle Mathurin
Mike Child
Mike Ellis
Mike Feist
Neil Jeffares
Neil Manthorpe
Neil Rennoldson
Neil Thomas
Nicholas Bentley
Norman Jones
Ossie Dales
P Rees
Pali Rao
Paul Collenette
Paul Hampton
Paul Holroyd
Paul L D Rank
Paul Massot
Paul Morris
Paul Pedley
Paul Roberts
Peter Adamson
Peter Charlton
Peter Cripps
Peter Luck
Peter Sandercock
Peter Wallace
Phil Brooke
R Dixon Smith
Ray Spendley
Rexton Bunnett
Richard Allen
Richard Baker
Richard Porter
Richard Powell
Richard Watts
Rob Twisse
130
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
Robert Watson
Robert Young
Robin Broadbank
Robin Cherry
Robin Mukerji
Ronald Prentice
Ross Anderson
Roy Waters
Russell Barnes
Sally Ramage
Sarah Smith
Sheldon Greeberg
Simon Booth
Simon Le
v
ene
Simon Moss
Simon OâNeill
Sonia Wood
Soon Ong
Stanley Smith
Stephen Marshall
Ste
v
en Anderman
Susan Bell
Swithun Crowe
Syl
v
ia Panrucker
Ted Kendall
Theo Morgan
Tim Brooks
Tim Gander
Tom Duffy
Tom Ellis Huckstep
Tony Dean
Tony Langford
Tre
v
or Taylor
Wallace J McLean
William J Clark
William Kingston
William Scott
Willie Liam
131
The Gowers Review
R E S P O N S E S : O R G A N I S AT I O N S
Accent Software Ltd
Acti
v
e Rights Management
and Netresult
AHDS
V
isual Arts
AHRC Research Centre for
Studies in IP and Technology
Law, Uni
v
ersity of
Edinburgh
All Party Parliamentary Jazz
Appreciation Group
All3Media
Alliance Against IP Theft
Antenna Audio Ltd
Anti Copying in Design
ARM Ltd
Arts Council England
Ascot Racecourse Ltd
Ashurst
Association for Uni
v
ersity
Research and Industry Links
Association of Art Historians
Association of Independent
Music
Association of Learned and
Professional Society
Publishers
Association of
Photographers
Association of Scottish
Colleges
Association of Streaming
Media Companies
Association of the British
Pharmaceutical Industry
(ABPI)
Association of United
Recording Artists
AstraZeneca
Atmosphere Picture Library
Authorsâ Licensing and
Collecting Society Ltd
BAe Systems
BBC / BBC Worldwide Ltd
Biodi
v
ersity Organisation
BioIndustry Association
Biomedical Industry
Ad
v
isory Group
Bournemouth Uni
v
ersity
Brightman Art Library
British Academy
British and Irish Association
of Law Librarians
British Association of Picture
Libraries and Agencies
(BAPLA)
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
British Brands Group and
Anti-Counterfeiting Group
British Chambers of
Commerce
British Copyright Council
British Design Inno
v
ation
British Equity Collecting
Society (BECS)
British Film Institute
British Geological Sur
v
ey
British Library
British Music Rights
British Phonographic
Industry (BPI)
British Screen Ad
v
isory
Council
British Society of Plant
Breeders
British Telecom
British Uni
v
ersities Film and
V
ideo Council (BUF
V
C)
British
V
ideo Association
(B
V
A)
BSkyB
Business Software Alliance
(BSA)
CALL (Communication Aids
for Language and Learning)
Centre, Uni
v
ersity of
Edinburgh
Cambridge Assessment
Centre for the History and
Analysis of Recorded Music,
Royal Holloway, Uni
v
ersity
of London (CHARM)
Channel Four Tele
v
ision
Corporation
Channel 5 Broadcasting Ltd
Chartered Institute of
Journalists (CIJ)
Chartered Institute of Patent
Attorneys (CIPA)
Chartered Institute of Public
Relations (CIPR)
City of London Law Society
City of London Phonograph
and Gramaphone Society
Clifford Chance
Comite Interprofessionnel
Du
V
in De Champagne
(CI
V
C)
Competition Commission
Computer &
Communications Industry
Association (CCIA)
Computer Patent Annuities
(CPA) Management Systems
Ltd
ConcurrentComputing.co.uk
Confederation of British
Industry (CBI)
Consumer Project on
Technology
Contra
V
ision
Copyright Licensing Agency
Ltd
Creati
v
e Commons
Creators Rights Alliance
Crop Protection Association
Cuillin FM
Dart Sensors Ltd
Data Publishers Association
Da
v
enport Lyons
Design and Artists Copyright
Society (DACS)
Designs IQ
Dial Solutions
Digital Content Forum
Digital Curation Centre,
Uni
v
ersity of Edinburgh
Disability Rights
Commission
D J Association
D J Licensing Working Party
Dr P R Lewis and Associates
Ltd
Dramatico Entertainment
Ltd
Dress Circle
Dutton
V
ocalion
East London In
v
entors Club
Educational Recording
Agency (ERA)
Electronic Frontier
Foundation (EFF)
Electronics Leadership
Council/UK Electronics
Alliance
Element Design
Elysium Ltd
EMI
Enfis Ltd
Entertainment and Leisure
Software Publishers
Association (ELSPA)
En
v
isage Ltd
Equity
Esterco Biofuel Ltd
Ethical Medicines Industry
Group (EMIG)
European Federation of
Journalists
132
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
European Publishers
Council
E
v
ergreen Melodies
Federation Against Software
Theft (FAST)
Federation of Small
Businesses (FSB)
FeONIC PLC
Field Fisher Waterhouse
Film Distributorsâ
Association Ltd
Flare Records
Foâcâsle Folk Club
Southampton
Foldback Media Ltd
Foundation for a Free
Information Infrastructure
(FFII) UK
Foundation for Information
Policy Research (FIPR)
Freddysays.com
Freeth Cartwright
Glasgow Caledonian
Uni
v
ersity
GlaxoSmithKline (GSK)
Global
V
illage Ltd
Handy women
Hospital Broadcast
Association
Ian Anderson Group of
Companies Ltd
Iansyst Ltd
ICI
Incorporated Society of
Musicians
Institute of Child Health
Institute of Patentees and
In
v
entors
Institute of Professional
Sport
Institute of Trade Mark
Attorneys
Institute of
V
ideography
Institution of Engineering
and Technology
Intel Corporation, Europe,
Middle East & Africa
Intellect
Intellectual Property
Institute
Intellectual Property
Lawyersâ Association
International Association for
the Study of Popular Music
(IASPM)
International Association of
Music Libraries, Archi
v
es
and Documentation Centres
(IAML)
International Chamber of
Commerce (ICC)
International Concertina
Association
International Federation of
the Phonographic Industry
(IFPI)
International Military Music
Society (UK Branch)
International Policy Network
(IPN)
IP Wales
IT
V
Jazz Ser
v
ices
Johnson Matthey PLC
Joint Information Systems
Committee (JISC)
JSP Records
Just Media Resources
Lancaster Uni
v
ersity
Law Society
Law Society of Scotland
Libraries and Archi
v
es
Copyright Alliance (LACA)
[including Museum
Copyright Group (MCG)]
Licensing Executi
v
es Society
Lowlights Publishing
MacRoberts
McDonald Bridge
Mechanical Copyright
Protection Society and
Performing Rights Society
Alliance
Mellotone Records
Microsoft
Milbank Tweed Hadley and
McCloy
Motion Picture Association
MP4
Muirhead Management
Museum Documentation
Association
Museums, Libraries and
Archi
v
es Council
Music Business Forum
Music Hall Magazine
Music Managers Forum
Music Traditions Records
Music Usersâ Council (UK)
133
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
Music
V
ideo Producers
Association
Musical Stages Magazine
Musiciansâ Union
National Academies
National Archi
v
es
National Association for
Music in Higher Education
(NAMHE)
National Consumer Council
(NCC)
National Council on
Archi
v
es
National Library for the
Blind
National Library of Scotland
National Library of Wales
National Museum Directors
Conference and Museums
Copyright Group
National Union of
Journalists
Naxos UK
National Endowment for
Science Technology and the
Arts (NESTA)
Newspaper Licensing
Agency Ltd
Newspaper Society
NHS Inno
v
ations East
Midlands
NHS Inno
v
ations South East
Northern Lights PR
ntl
Open Plan Solutions Ltd
Open Rights Group
Open Uni
v
ersity
Opendawn Ltd
Ordnance Sur
v
ey
Organisations representing
Specific Learning Difficulties
Own It
Oxford Intellectual Property
Research Institute
PACT
Past Perfect
Patent and Trade Mark
Group (PATMG)
Peninsula Medical School
Periodical Publishers
Association
Personal Managersâ
Association (PMA)
Philips Intellectual Property
and Standards
Phonographic Performance
Ltd and
V
ideo Performance
Ltd
Pierian Records
Pink Floyd
Poppy Records
Professional Contractorsâ
Group
Proper Music Group
Public Patent Foundation
Publishers Association
Publishers Licencing Society
QinetiQ Ltd
Queen Mary IP Research
Institute, Uni
v
ersity of
London
Queenâs Uni
v
ersity of Belfast
Racecourse Association Ltd
Racehorse Holdings Trust
Ltd
Random House Group Ltd
Rangers Football Club
Redeye The Photography
Network
Reed Else
v
ier Group plc
Research Councils UK
Research Information
Network
Reuters
Right to Read Alliance
Ri
v
ers Consultancy
Roehampton Uni
v
ersity
Rollercoaster Records
Royal Bank of Scotland
Group plc
Royal National Institute of
the Blind (RNIB)
Royal Society
Royal Society of Arts
S4C
Sage
Scientific Generics Ltd
Scottish Funding Council
Scottish Intellectual Assets
Centre
Scottish Screen
Sepia Records
Share the
V
ision
Sheffield Hallam Uni
v
ersity
Sheridans Solicitors
Skyscan Photolibrary
Society for Computers and
Law
134
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
Society of College, National
and Uni
v
ersity Libraries
(SCONUL)
Society of Information
Technology Management
Open Source Software
Group (SOCITM)
Society of London Theatre
and Theatrical Management
Association (SOLTTMA)
Sports Rights Owners
Coalition (SROC)
Stanford Law School
Stock Artists Alliance
Stockholm Network
Sun Microsystems Inc
Swedish Society of Popular
Music Composers (SKAP)
Technical Ad
v
isory Ser
v
ice
for Images, Institute for
Learning and Research
Technology, Uni
v
ersity of
Bristol
Tertullian Project
Tesco plc
The Blacksmith Collection
Ltd
The British Association of
The International
Federation of Industrial
Property Attorneys (FICPI -
UK)
The Laureate Company
The Learning Machine
The Monster Factory
This England and E
v
ergreen
Magazines
Tiny Quest
Tony Smith Personal
Management
Trade Marks, Patents &
Designs Federation
(TMPDF)
Trading Standards, North
West (TSNW) IP Group
UCB S.A.
UK Association of Online
Publishers
UK Film Council
UK Hydrographic Office
UK Professional Football
Leagues
UNICO: The Uni
v
ersity
Companies Association
Unile
v
er plc
Uni
v
ersities UK
Uni
v
ersities UK & Standing
Conference of Principals
(UUK&SCOP)
Uni
v
ersity of Edinburgh IP
Academics
Uni
v
ersity of Glasgow
Uni
v
ersity of Hull
Uni
v
ersity of Leicester
Uni
v
ersity of Li
v
erpool
Uni
v
ersity of Loughborough
Uni
v
ersity of Manchester
Uni
v
ersity of Newcastle
Uni
v
ersity of Oxford
Uni
v
ersity of Southampton
Centre for Enterprise and
Inno
v
ation
Uni
v
ersity of Surrey
Uni
v
ersity of Sydney
Uni
v
ersity of Wales,
Aberystwyth
Uni
v
ersity of Wales, Swansea
Uni
v
ersity of Warwick
V
ideo Networks Ltd
V
illeroy & Boch
Warner Brothers
Entertainment UK
Wedlake Bell
Welsh Assembly
Go
v
ernment
wePod
West Country In
v
entors
Club
Wheal Associates Ltd
Yahoo
Yorkshire Garland Group
135
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
C A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B.3
This Call for E
v
idence will form a key part of the e
v
idence base that the Re
v
iew team
can use to de
v
elop its analysis. It will be used alongside a range of other e
v
idence sources,
including quantitati
v
e data; sur
v
eys and
v
iews of representati
v
e groups;
v
isits; seminars; and
inter
v
iews.
We encourage stakeholders to submit evidence in three areas:
â˘
First, we in
v
ite e
v
idence on a series of
General Questions
for each of these
elements of the IP system identified. These are set out below.
â˘
Second, there are also a number of
Specific Issues
on which we would
particularly welcome e
v
idence. These are also set out below.
â˘
Finally, we also in
v
ite respondents to
highlight other issues
on which the
Re
v
iew should focus its attention that are within our scope, but not listed
below.
G E N E R A L Q U E S T I O N S
H o w I P i s a w a r d e d
1
.
Are there barriers to obtaining IP rights due to system complexity? What could be done
to impro
v
e this situation?
2.
How easy is it to find out about obtaining IP rights? What could be done to impro
v
e
awareness for businesses and inno
v
ators? Is there sufficient awareness of the need to
protect IP internationally?
3.
Are there barriers to obtaining UK IP rights on grounds of cost? What dri
v
es these costs?
4.
How do these costs compare internationally in your organisationâs experience?
5.
Do you ha
v
e any comments on the UK Patent Office fees structure for obtaining and
renewing IP protection?
6.
Is lack of trust in the system a barrier? To what extent do you rely on other tools to bring
inno
v
ation to the marketplace, such as being first to market, maintaining trade secrets,
or using an open inno
v
ation model to generate
v
alue through reputation or network
effects?
7.
Are there specific barriers to obtaining IP rights in your sector?
8.
Are there specific barriers to obtaining IP rights for small businesses or indi
v
iduals?
9.
How well does the national system for awarding IP, administered by the Patent Office
perform? How well do the international and European systems work?
H o w I P i s u s e d
1
.
What types of IP does your organisation use and why?
2.
To what extent do you seek multiple o
v
erlapping forms of IP protection?
3.
To what extent are these decisions influenced by sector-specific considerations?
136
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
4.
How does your company
v
alue its IP? Are there problems with raising finance against
intangible assets based on IP? What impro
v
ements could be made in this area?
5.
To what extent does the term of IP rights at the margin affect in
v
estment decisions?
6.
How well does the UK IP system promote inno
v
ation?
7.
To what extent does your organisation make use of other methods used by Go
v
ernment
to encourage inno
v
ation, such as public funding?
8.
Are data on the use of patents and other forms of IP useful as a means of measuring
inno
v
ation?
9.
Do you ha
v
e any e
v
idence as to the static or dynamic costs that IP rights (as statutory
monopolies) impose on the economy?
1
0.
Ha
v
e you encountered patents or other IP rights being used defensi
v
ely, i.e. obtained
not to de
v
elop products, but only to pre
v
ent others from doing so? Under what
circumstances do you consider this acceptable?
H o w I P i s l i c e n s e d a n d e x c h a n g e d
1
.
How easy is it to negotiate licences to use othersâ IP for commercial or non-profit
purposes?
2.
What mechanisms do you use for finding potential licensing partners?
3.
How easy is it to use othersâ IP for research purposes? Ha
v
e you experienced difficulty
around research exemptions?
4.
Are there specific barriers to licensing in the main forms of IP currently used: patents,
copyright, trade marks, and designs?
5.
Are there barriers to licensing IP on grounds of cost? What dri
v
es these costs?
6.
Are there specific barriers to licensing IP in your sector?
7.
Does your organisation use methods to facilitate exchange of IP - such as cross-licensing
or pooling IP rights with other firms or organisations?
8.
Are there specific barriers to licensing IP rights for small businesses or indi
v
iduals - for
example barriers to entry to patent pools?
9.
Are there barriers to trade and exchange of IP internationally?
1
0.
Does your organisation consider renewing patents using âlicence of rightâ pro
v
isions in
patent law (which entitle any person to a licence under your patent and reduce your
renewal fees by half )?
11
.
What could be done to impro
v
e âlicence of rightâ pro
v
isions and business awareness of
them?
1
2.
Do you ha
v
e any experience of the compulsory licence pro
v
isions within current patent
law? Are they effecti
v
e? How could they be impro
v
ed?
137
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
H o w I P i s c h a l l e n g e d a n d e n f o r c e d
1
.
Are there specific problems with enforcing the main different forms of IP: patents,
copyright, trade marks, and designs?
2.
Are there barriers to challenging infringement and enforcing your IP rights on grounds
of cost? What dri
v
es these costs?
3.
To what extent does your organisation make use of other methods than litigation to
resol
v
e IP infringement cases, for example the Patent Office opinion ser
v
ice, mediation
ser
v
ices, Alternati
v
e Dispute Resolution, or the Copyright Tribunal?
4.
To what extent do you use IP litigation insurance? How effecti
v
e is it?
5.
Are there barriers to using such methods to settle IP disputes without recourse to
litigation? How might they be remo
v
ed?
6.
Are there specific barriers to challenging and enforcement of IP rights for small
businesses or indi
v
iduals?
7.
To what extent is the risk of litigation a factor in your organisationâs in
v
estment in
inno
v
ation?
8.
What are the principal barriers to efficient and successful challenge and enforcement
internationally?
S P E C I F I C I S S U E S
C u r r e n t t e r m o f p r o t e c t i o n o n s o u n d r e c o r d i n g s a n d
p e r f o r m e r s â r i g h t s
Background: The Re
v
iew will fulfil the Go
v
ernmentâs commitment to examine whether the
current 50 year term of protection on sound recordings and performersâ rights in sound
recordings is appropriate, in the light of its extension to 95 years in a number of other
jurisdictions.
1
.
What are your
v
iews on this issue?
2.
Is there e
v
idence to show the impact that a change in term would ha
v
e on in
v
estment,
creati
v
ity, and consumer interests?
3.
Are you aware of the impact that different lengths of term ha
v
e had on in
v
estment,
creati
v
ity, and consumer interests in other countries?
4.
Are there alternati
v
e arrangements that could accompany an extension of term (e.g.
licence of right for any extended term)?
5.
If term were to be extended, should it be extended retrospecti
v
ely (for existing works) or
solely for new creations?
138
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
C o p y r i g h t e x c e p t i o n s â f a i r u s e / f a i r d e a l i n g
Background: There are a number of exceptions to copyright that allow limited use of
copyright works without the permission of the copyright holder.
1
.
What are your
v
iews on the current exceptions in copyright law?
2.
Could more be done to clarify the
v
arious exceptions?
3.
Are there other areas where copyright exceptions should apply?
4.
Are the current exceptions adequate or in need of updating to reflect technological
change? For example copyright law in the UK does not currently ha
v
e a pri
v
ate âfair useâ
exception. Such an exception might allow indi
v
iduals to copy music CDs onto their PC
and MP3 player for their personal use. Should UK law include a statutory exception for
âfair useâ?
5.
How would you see content owners being compensated for such use?
6.
To what extent has technological change presented difficulties in use of copyrighted
material in the field of education?
7.
Are there issues concerning the archi
v
ing of material co
v
ered by copyright?
C o p y r i g h t â d i g i t a l r i g h t s m a n a g e m e n t
Background: Increasingly digital media content is distributed with digital rights management
(DRM) technologies that can enable rights-holders to track usage and pre
v
ent unlicensed
copying by technological means. Howe
v
er concerns ha
v
e been raised about interoperability
and that such technologies may impair the content consumerâs legal rights. For example they
may be unable to take into account exceptions to copyright, the ultimate expiry of copyright
term, or the future e
v
olution of technology. They may therefore undermine legitimate rights
to access digital content, now and in the future. (NB: We are aware of all formal submissions
that ha
v
e been made to the All Party Parliamentary Internet Group on this issue.)
1
.
Do you ha
v
e a
v
iew on how the use of digital rights management technologies should be
regulated?
C o p y r i g h t â o r p h a n w o r k s
1
.
Ha
v
e you experienced any difficulties in identifying the owners of copyright content
when seeking permission to use that content?
2.
Do you ha
v
e any suggestions on how this problem could be o
v
ercome?
C o p y r i g h t â l i c e n s i n g o f p u b l i c p e r f o r m a n c e s
1
.
Ha
v
e you encountered problems with the system of licensing and paying royalties to
collecting societies for public performance of music and/or sound recordings?
2.
Could the system be clarified or simplified, and if so how do you see this working?
139
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
Pa t e n t s â u t i l i t y m o d e l s
Background: Some countries, notably Germany, ha
v
e a âutility modelâ system offering
protection for simple in
v
entions, usually subject to less examination and shorter terms than
standard patents.
1
.
Do you ha
v
e a
v
iew on some sort of second tier patent system?
2.
Has your organisation encountered problems in protecting its IP internationally where
such systems exist?
P h a r m a c e u t i c a l S u p p l e m e n t a r y Pr o t e c t i o n C e r t i f i c a t e s
( S P C s )
Background: SPCs are a âsui generisâ IP right a
v
ailable in EU Member States for
pharmaceutical products (as well as plant protection products). The standard patent term is
20 years. SPCs aim to compensate rights holders for the time required to obtain regulatory
appro
v
al for their products. Where regulatory appro
v
al is issued more than fi
v
e years after a
patent is granted, SPCs may be granted to extend the term of protection on the acti
v
e
ingredient in the patented product. SPCs last for a term corresponding to the period elapsed
between the fi
v
e-year point and the point at which the product reaches market, up to a
maximum term of 5 years.
1
.
Does your organisation use SPCs?
2.
How fair and effecti
v
e are they in deli
v
ering an incenti
v
e for in
v
estment?
3.
How could they be impro
v
ed?
4.
Should the term of SPCs be more flexible â perhaps relating straightforwardly to the
period between patent award and regulatory appro
v
al?
Tr a d e M a r k s â i n t e r n a t i o n a l i s s u e s
1
.
To what extent does your organisation register its trade marks at the European rather
than national le
v
el?
2.
Could the UK trade mark system be impro
v
ed to work better alongside the European
system?
D e s i g n s â r e g i s t e r e d d e s i g n s a n d u n r e g i s t e r e d d e s i g n
r i g h t s
1
.
To what extent does your organisation rely on registered designs? And on unregistered
design rights?
2.
To what extent does your organisation register its design at the European rather than
national le
v
el?
3.
To what extent does your organisation rely on the European unregistered design right
rather than the national UK unregistered design right?
4.
Could the UK registered design be impro
v
ed to work better alongside the European
system?
5.
Could the UK unregistered design right be simplified to work better alongside the
European unregistered design right?
6.
Do you see a useful role for the UK unregistered design right alongside the European
design right?
140
The Gowers Review
C
A L L F O R E V I D E N C E
B
L e g a l s a n c t i o n s o n I P i n f r i n g e m e n t
1
.
Are you aware of any inconsistencies or inadequacies in the way the law applies legal
sanctions to infringement of different forms of IP or to different circumstances?
2.
For example, should criminal sanctions on online infringement be the same as those
relating to physical infringement?
C o h e r e n c e b e t w e e n c o m p e t i t i o n p o l i c y a n d I P p o l i c y
1
.
Has your organisation experienced any acti
v
ity linked to IP rights that you regarded as
unfair competition?
2.
How did you deal with this problem?
3.
Was competition law effecti
v
e at controlling this beha
v
iour?
4.
Should competition law ha
v
e a greater role to play in regulating IP?
5.
How would you see the system working?
Pa r a l l e l I m p o r t s / I n t e r n a t i o n a l E x h a u s t i o n
Background: European law does not allow firms to use trade mark or copyright law to pre
v
ent
their goods sold in one EEA Member State from being imported and resold in another
Member State â i.e. they are not able to segment the EU market. Howe
v
er European law does
allow the use of trade mark and copyright law to restrict the imports to EU Member States of
goods sold outside the EEA. It also specifically inhibits EU Member States from legislating to
remo
v
e such import restrictions at the national le
v
el â so called âinternational exhaustionâ of
trade marks or copyright. There has been a good deal of debate, both here in the UK and at
EU le
v
el, about the costs and benefits of remo
v
ing restrictions on parallel imports. There is a
further issue of firms taking ad
v
antage of
v
ariations in prices on pharmaceutical products
across the EU and repackaging drugs bought cheaply elsewhere within the EEA to resell
within the UK.
1
.
Has your company been affected by parallel trade?
2.
What would be the impact on your organisation of a change in the current rules?
3.
What e
v
idence is there of the costs and benefits, both for consumers and firms of the
current rules?
141
The Gowers Review
142
The Gowers Review